Yamaha RX A710 Manual (USA )

User Manual: Yamaha RX-A710 Manual (USA )

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 141 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

En 1
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
English for U.S.A.
Be sure to read “Safety Brochure” (supplied booklet) before using this unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
What you can do with this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connecting video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Connecting audio devices (CD players, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6 Connecting to the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting video/audio recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Connecting a device compatible with SCENE link playback (remote connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 33
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selecting the input source and favorite settings at once (SCENE) . . 39
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Registering favorite radio stations (preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Selecting a SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Registering favorite channels (preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Playing back iPod music/videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Playback of iPod contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
FEATURES
SETUP
PLAYBACK
En 3
Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Connecting a Bluetooth receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Pairing Bluetooth components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Establishing a wireless connection and playing back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Playing back music stored on PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Preparing for Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Controlling this unit from the web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Configuring settings in accordance with a playback source (Option menu)
. . . 76
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
. . . 84
Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Viewing information about this unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . 100
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . 101
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Resetting the Parental Lock code number (SR LOCK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MON.CHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Updating the firmware of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Error indications for SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
CONFIGURATIONS APPENDIX
En 4
Ideal speaker layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with this product.
■ Remote control ■ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x 2)
■ YPAO microphone ■ VIDEO AUX input cover
Insert into the remote control in the correct polarity (+/-)
■ AM antenna ■ FM antenna
■ Power cable ■ Easy Setup Guide
■ CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual) ■ Safety Brochure
* The figure of the supplied power cable
differs depending on regions.
*The figure of the supplied FM antenna
differs depending on regions.
Operating range of the remote control
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of
differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
• This manual mainly explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” means both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless the explanation describes exceptions.
• “ ” indicates the cautions concerning operations or setup of the unit.
• “ ” indicates the explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within 6 m (20 ft)
En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with this unit
Supports 2 to 7.1 (plus presence) channel
speaker system. Allows you to enjoy favorite
acoustic spaces in various styles.
Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO) p.33
Sound field reproductions like actual
movie theaters and concert halls from
stereo or multi-channel audio sources
(CINEMA DSP)
p.41
Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
p.44
Ready for any kind of contents
iPod p.54 Network p.64 to p.67
USB p.61 Bluetooth p.59
*Requires optional Bluetooth receiver for playback via Bluetooth
Operating external
devices with the supplied
remote control p.104
Operating the TV, AV
receiver and BD/DVD
player in combination
(HDMI Control) p.121
Selecting the input source and favorite
settings at once (SCENE) p.39
AV receiver (this unit)
Speakers
USB deviceNetwork contents
via Bluetooth iPod
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
Remote control
of this unit TV remote control
Audio
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Video
TV
En 7
Full of useful functions!
●Connecting various devices (p.26)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on this unit allow you to connect video devices such as
BD/DVD players, audio devices such as CD players,
game consoles and camcorders, and so on.
●Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.21)
When using a TV that supports ARC, you only need a
single HDMI cable to connect the TV and this unit to
output video to the TV, input audio from the TV, and
transmit HDMI Control signals.
●Creating stereoscopic sound fields (p.43)
Connection of presence speakers enables to create a
natural stereoscopic sound field in your room (CINEMA
DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers are
connected, this unit automatically creates Virtual
Presence Speaker (VPS) to produce 3D surround
sound.
●Listening to FM/AM radio (p.45) or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio (p.48)
This unit is equipped with the built-in FM/AM tuner and
SIRIUS jack for connecting the SiriusConnect tuner (sold
separately). You can register favorite radio stations as
presets.
●Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.44)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, this unit plays
back the selected source with the least circuitry. It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
●Easy operation with a TV screen
You can navigate the various contents (iPod, USB,
network, etc.), view the information, or configure the
settings using the on-screen menu.
At time like this
The combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on
this unit does not match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Input” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it match the
output jack of your external device (p.27).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.93).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select whether
to output audio signals through this unit and the TV (p.95).
I want this unit to be turned off automatically when not in
use...
Use “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to set the
amount of time for auto-standby (p.97).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language
from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish and
Russian (p.99).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update
the firmware of this unit (p.103). If this unit is connected to
the Internet, the corresponding message will be displayed
on the TV when a newer firmware is available (p.107).
There are many other settings to customize this unit.
For details, see the following pages.
●Input settings (p.79)
●Scene settings (p.82)
●Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.85)
●Various function settings (p.88)
●Information view (audio signal, video signal, etc.) (p.100)
●System settings (p.102)
BD/DVD
player
Game
console
Camcorder
Set-top box
TV
CD player
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
En 8
Front panel
1MAIN ZONE
Turns on/off (standby) this unit.
2Standby indicator
Lights up when this unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
- HDMI Control is enabled (p.121)
- The standby through function is enabled (p.96)
- The network standby function is enabled (p.96)
- The iPod is being charged (p.80)
- An iPod wireless system is connected (p.55)
3ZONE2
Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.71).
4ZONE CONTROL
Switches the zones (main or Zone2) to operate with the front
panel controllers (p.71).
5INFO
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.75).
6MEMORY
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.45).
Registers SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels as preset
channels (p.50).
Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.72).
7PRESET
Selects a preset FM/AM radio station (p.46).
Selects a preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel (p.50).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.72).
8FM/AM (CATEGORY)
Switches between FM and AM (p.45).
Selects a channel category for SIRIUS Satellite Radio (p.49).
9TUNING/CH
Selects an FM/AM radio frequency (p.45) or a SIRIUS
Satellite Radio channel (p.49).
@Front display
Displays information (p.9).
ARemote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
BPURE DIRECT
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.44).
CINPUT
Selects an input source.
DPHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
EUSB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.61) or an iPod via
USB (p.54).
FYPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.33).
GSCENE
Selects the registered input source and sound program at
once. Additionally, you can turn on this unit when it is in
standby mode (p.39).
HTONE CONTROL
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of sounds output from speakers and headphones (p.77).
IPROGRAM
Selects a sound program or a surround decoder (p.40).
JSTRAIGHT
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.43).
KVIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting camcorders, game consoles, etc (p.29). To
protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input
cover when not in use.
LVOLUME
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL INFO MEMORY
FM AM
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
VIDEOHDMI IN L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHTTONE CONTROL
BD/DVD TV CD RADIO
YPAO MIC
USBPHONES
SILENT CINEMA iPod/iPhone
PROGRAM
SCENE
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-A710
PRESET CATEGORY TUNING/CH
B07 8 94 536 A21
C LD E F HG JI K
En 9
Front display (indicators)
1HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
2SIRIUS
Lights up when “SIRIUS” is selected as the input source.
3CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.41) is working.
CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.43) is working.
4ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.44) is
working.
5ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.77) is working.
6STEREO
Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when this unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
7SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
8ZONE 2
Lights up when the audio output to Zone2 is enabled.
9MUTE
Flashes when audio is muted.
0Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
ACursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
BInformation display
Displays the current status (input name, sound mode name,
etc). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.75).
CSpeaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
Front speaker (L)
Front speaker (R)
Center speaker
Surround speaker (L)
Surround speaker (R)
Surround back speaker (L)
Surround back speaker (R)
Surround back speaker
Presence speaker (L)
Presence speaker (R)
Subwoofer
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
MUTE
ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC
OUT
3
ZONE
2
PR
PL
SBL SBSBR
SIRIUS
2345789
1 0
A A
B
C
6
3
En 10
Rear panel
1SIRIUS jack
For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately)
(p.48).
2DOCK jack
For connecting an optional Yamaha products such as iPod
dock (p.55), iPod wireless system (p.55) and Bluetooth
receiver (p.59).
3NETWORK jack
For connecting to the network (p.30).
4ANTENNA jacks
For connecting FM and AM antennas (p.29).
5HDMI OUT jack
For connecting an HDMI-compatible TV to output video/
audio signals (p.21). When using ARC, TV audio signal is
input through this jack.
6MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jack:
For connecting a TV compatible with component video to
output video signals (p.25).
VIDEO jack:
For connecting a TV compatible with composite video to
output video signals (p.25).
7HDMI1~5 jacks
For connecting HDMI-compatible playback devices to input
video/audio signals (p.26).
8SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting speakers (p.17).
9AV1~6 jacks
For connecting video/audio playback devices to input video/
audio signals (p.26).
0AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (VCR, etc.)
when an analog input (V-AUX, AV3~6 or AUDIO1~2) is
selected (p.31).
AAUDIO1~2 jacks
For connecting audio playback devices to input audio
signals (p.28).
BREMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting a Yamaha product compatible with SCENE
link playback (p.31), or connecting an infrared signal
receiver/emitter to operate devices including this unit from
another room (p.70).
CTRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting a device that supports the trigger function
(p.32).
DAUDIO OUT jacks
For outputting audio to a recording device (tape deck, etc.)
when an analog input (V-AUX, AV5~6 or AUDIO1~2) is
selected (p.31).
EZONE2 OUT jacks
For connecting external amplifier used in Zone2 to output
audio (p.70).
FSUBWOOFER jack
For connecting a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.17).
GAC IN
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.32).
AC IN
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
RRLL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
TRIGGER OUT
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL
OPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
ZONE 2
OUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
RL R L
SINGLE
SIRIUS
+12V
0.1A MAX.
A C0
85
3274
9
61
BDE F
G
En 11
Remote control
1Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2MAIN/ZONE2
Switches the zones (main or Zone2) to operate with the
remote control (p.71).
3SOURCE
Turns on/off an external device.
4Input selection keys
Select an input source to play back.
HDMI1~5 HDMI1~5 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AV1~6 AV1~6 jacks
AUDIO AUDIO1~2 jacks (press repeatedly to switch
between “AUDIO1” and “AUDIO2”)
DOCK DOCK jack
TUNER FM/AM radio
SIRIUS SIRIUS jack
NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
5Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source or SIRIUS Satellite Radio when “SIRIUS” is
selected.
FM Switches to FM radio.
AM Switches to AM radio.
(CATEGORY)
Selects a channel category for SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio channels as presets.
PRESET Selects a preset FM/AM radio station or a
preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel.
TUN./CH Selects an FM/AM radio frequency or a SIRIUS
Satellite Radio channel.
6INFO
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.75).
7SLEEP
Switches this unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
8SCENE
Selects the assigned input source and sound program at
once. Additionally, you can turn on this unit when it is in
standby mode (p.39).
9ON SCREEN
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
0Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
AMODE
Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio
reception.
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.57).
BNumeric keys
Enter numerical values such as radio frequencies.
CTV operation keys
Operate TV input, TV volume, etc (p.104).
DCODE SET
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.104).
ESOURCE/RECEIVER
Switches the devices (this unit or external device) to operate
with the remote control (p.105). You can operate this unit
when this key lights up in orange, and an external device
when this key lights up in green.
FRECEIVER
Turns on/off (standby) this unit.
GSound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.40).
HOPTION
Displays the option menu (p.76).
IVOLUME
Adjusts the volume.
JDISPLAY
Display the status information on the TV (p.75).
KMUTE
Mutes the audio output.
LExternal device operation keys
Operate playback and menu display etc. for external
devices (p.105).
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device in advance (p.104).
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
MAIN
ZONE 2
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
MUTE
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
K
J
L
En 12
SETUP
Now all the preparations are complete. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio, etc. with this unit!
General setup procedure
1Placing speakers (p.13)
Select the speaker layout depending on the number of speakers and place the speakers in your room.
2Connecting speakers (p.17) Connect the speakers to this unit.
3Connecting a TV (p.21) Connect a TV to this unit.
4Connecting playback devices (p.26) Connect video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.) and audio devices (CD players, etc.) to this unit.
5Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.29) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to this unit.
6Connecting to the network (p.30) Connect this unit to the network.
7Connecting other devices (p.31) Connect external devices such as recording devices.
8Connecting the power cable (p.32) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.33)
Optimize the speaker settings such as volume balance and acoustic parameters to suit your room (YPAO).
En 13
Select the speaker layout depending on the number of speakers and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the
representative speaker layout examples.
• For information on the ideal speaker layout, see “Ideal speaker layout” (p.116).
• If you have 7 speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers or presence speakers. To reinforce the rear right/left sounds, use them as surround back speakers.
To create a natural stereoscopic sound field, use them as presence speakers.
1Placing speakers
Caution
• This unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers at the factory. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance of this unit to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For
details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.16).
Speaker type Abbr. Function Speaker system (the number of channels)
7.1+2 7.1 7.1 6.1 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
● ●●●●●●●
Front (R) ● ●●●●●●●
Center Produces center channel sounds (dialogs, vocals, etc). ●●●●● ●
Surround (L) Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when
no surround back speakers are connected.
● ●●●●●
Surround (R) ● ●●●●●
Surround back (L) Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.
●●
Surround back (R) ●●
Surround back Produces mixed-down surround back right/left channel sounds. ●
Presence (L) Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.43), the presence speakers create a
natural stereoscopic sound field in your room.
●●
Presence (R) ●●
Subwoofer Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. ● ●●●●●●●
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 14
7.1+2 channel system 7.1 channel system (using surround back speakers)
7.1 channel system (using presence speakers) 6.1 channel system
• The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. This unit
automatically switches the speakers to be used depending on a selected CINEMA DSP (p.41).
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 15
5.1 channel system 4.1 channel system
3.1 channel system 2.1 channel system
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 16
■ Setting the speaker impedance
This unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers at the factory. When connecting 6-ohm
speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-
ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1Before connecting speakers, connect the supplied power cable to
this unit and then to an AC wall outlet.
2While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN
ZONE .
3Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5Press MAIN ZONE to set this unit to standby mode and remove
the power cable from the AC wall outlet.
Now you are ready to connect the speakers.
MAIN ZONE
STRAIGHT
SPIMP.-8MIN
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 17
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
Here are connections of 7.1+2, 7.1 and 6.1 channel
system as examples. If you select another system,
connect speakers while referring to the connection of
6.1 channel system.
Cables necessary for connection (commercially
available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (x 1)
(for connecting a subwoofer)
7.1+2 channel system 7.1 channel system
(using surround back speakers)
2Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the power cable of this unit from an AC wall outlet and
turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch
anything or come into contact with the metal areas of this unit.
This may damage this unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES” will appear on the
front display when this unit is turned on.
–
+
–
+
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
RRLL
SUBWOOFER
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
RL R L
SINGLE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
RRLL
SUBWOOFER
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
RL R L
SINGLE
This unit (rear) This unit (rear)
1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 18
7.1 channel system
(using presence speakers)
6.1 channel system
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it
to the SINGLE jack (L side).
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
RRLL
SUBWOOFER
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
RL R L
SINGLE
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
RRLL
SUBWOOFER
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
RL R L
SINGLE
This unit (rear)This unit (rear)
1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 19
■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the
negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the
other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored
to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the
negative and the other wire to the positive.
aRemove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the
ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the
cable together firmly.
bLoosen the speaker terminal.
cInsert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
dTighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
aTighten the speaker terminal.
bInsert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
■ Connecting the subwoofer
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.90) in the “Setup” menu to “5ch BI-AMP” after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
FRONT
aa
b
b
c
c
d
d
+ (red)
– (black)
bb
a
a
Banana plug
Audio pin cable
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. When not making
bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are
connected before connecting the speaker cables.
• When using bi-amp connections, surround back speakers
cannot be used.
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
RRLL
SUBWOOFER
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
RL R L
SINGLE
This unit (rear)
1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 20
■ Video/audio jacks
HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• To connect a device that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is
required.
• The HDMI jacks of this unit support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D video transmission (through output)
features.
■ Video jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■ Audio jacks
OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable.
Input/output jacks and cables
HDMI cable
Component video cable
Video pin cable
Digital Optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
En 21
Connect a TV to this unit so that videos input to this unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on this unit.
The connection method varies depending on functions and video input jacks available
on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
■
Connection method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to this unit with an HDMI cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.95) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you make an HDMI connection between your TV and this unit, any videos input to this unit can be output
to the TV no matter how you connect video devices to this unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.120).
3Connecting a TV
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to this unit with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit
(power, volume, etc.) in conjunction with TV remote control operations. You can also
control playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player, etc.)
connected to this unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.121).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. So if you connect
a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to this unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to this unit.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
Does your TV support
HDMI Control?
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack? ■ Connection method 3 (p.24)
■ Connection method 2 (p.23)
■ Connection method 1 (p.21)
■ Connection method 4 (p.25)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDI
O
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
SIRIUS
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
This unit
(rear)
TV
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 22
Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operations of your TV, refer to the instruction manual of the
TV.
1After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and
power cable of this unit, turn on this unit, TV and playback devices.
2Configure the settings of this unit.
aCheck that ARC is enabled on the TV.
bSwitch the TV input to display the video from this unit.
cPress ON SCREEN.
dUse the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
eUse the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI”.
fUse the cursor keys to select “HDMI Control” ( / ) and press ENTER.
gUse the cursor keys to select “On”.
hPress ON SCREEN.
3Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
aEnable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/
DVD player, etc).
bTurn off the main power of the TV and then turn off this unit and playback devices.
cTurn on the main power of the TV and then turn on this unit and playback devices.
dSwitch the TV input to display the video from this unit.
eCheck the followings.
On this unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
gCheck that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
Now the necessary settings are complete.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of this unit will
be automatically switched to “AV4” and the TV audio will be played back on this unit.
If TV audio cannot be heard, check that “ARC” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and re-plugging) the
devices. It may solve the problem.
• If any audio interruption happens while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and
use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to this unit (p.23).
• “AV4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV4
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To
use the SCENE function (p.39), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
VOLUME
ENTER
POP UP
DISPLAY
OPTION
VO
L
U
ME
POP UP
DISPLAY
O
PTI
ON
D
DISP
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 23
■ Connection method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to this unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.95) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you make an HDMI connection between your TV and this unit, any videos input to this unit can be output
to the TV no matter how you connect video devices to this unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.120).
Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operations of your TV, refer to the instruction manual of the
TV.
1After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and
power cable of this unit, turn on this unit, TV and playback devices.
2Configure the settings of this unit.
aSwitch the TV input to display the video from this unit.
bPress ON SCREEN.
cUse the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
dUse the cursor keys ( / ) to select “HDMI”.
eUse the cursor keys to select “HDMI Control” ( / ) and press ENTER.
fUse the cursor keys to select “On”.
gPress ON SCREEN.
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDI
O
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
SIRIUS
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
HDMI
HDMI
OO
This unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
VOLUME
ENTER
POP UP
DISPLAY
OPTION
ON SCREEN
V
O
L
U
M
E
POP UP
DISPLAY
O
PTI
ON
D
DIS
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 24
3Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
aEnable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/
DVD player, etc).
bTurn off the main power of the TV and then turn off this unit and playback devices.
cTurn on the main power of the TV and then turn on this unit and playback devices.
dSwitch the TV input to display the video from this unit.
eCheck the followings.
On this unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
fCheck that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
Now the necessary settings are complete.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of this unit will
be automatically switched to “AV4” and the TV audio will be played back on this unit.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and re-plugging) the
devices. It may solve the problem.
• “AV4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV4
jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV
Audio Input” (p.95) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE
function (p.39), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
■ Connection method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to this unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
If switch the input source of this unit to “AV4” by pressing AV4 or SCENE(TV), the TV
audio will be played back on this unit.
• If you make an HDMI connection between your TV and this unit, any videos input to this unit can be output
to the TV no matter how you connect video devices to this unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.120).
• If you have connected any external device to the AV4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV1~6 and AUDIO1~2 jacks. To use
the SCENE function (p.39), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDI
O
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
SIRIUS
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI
OPTICAL
HDMI
HDMI
OO
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
This unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
HDMI input
TV
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 25
■ Connection method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following
connections.
If you select “AV4” as the input source by pressing AV4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio will
be played back on this unit.
• If you connect your TV to this unit with a cable other than HDMI, videos input to this unit via HDMI cannot
be output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to
Analog Conversion” setting. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.120).
• If you have connected any external device to the AV4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV1~6 and AUDIO1~2 jacks. To use
the SCENE function (p.39), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
V
I
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
MONITOR O
R
IUS
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OO
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
MONITOR OUT
P
R
P
B
Y
This unit
(rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks Video input
(component video)
AV4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
TRIG
G
NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
MPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
RE
M
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
V
V
This unit
(rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
TV
Video input
(composite video)
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9
En 26
This unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod, a Bluetooth component or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
- Connecting an iPod (p.54)
- Connecting a Bluetooth receiver (p.59)
- Connecting a USB storage device (p.61)
Connecting video devices (BD/DVD players, etc.)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles
to this unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device,
choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the
video device has an HDMI output jack.
• Videos input to this unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to this unit with a cable other than
HDMI.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on this unit does not match your video device,
change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.27).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to this unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI1~5, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from this unit.
■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to this unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on this unit) depending
on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV1~2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from this unit.
4Connecting playback devices
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2
1
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
ZONE 2
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
RL R L
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
HDMI
This unit
(rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI1~5 jacks
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on this unit
Video Audio
Component video Digital optical AV1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
DOCK NETWORK
FMGND AM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDI
O
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
SIRIUS
AV 2
AV 1
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OO
CC
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
This unit (rear)
AV1~2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital optical or digital
coaxial)
AV1(OPTICAL) jack or
AV2(COAXIAL) jack
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9
En 27
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to this unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on this unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV3~6, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from this unit.
■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks prepared on this unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. It
enables you to connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV5 (AUDIO) jacks of this unit, change the combination setting as follows.
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on this unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV5 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AV6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
DOCK NETWORK
FMGND AM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDI
O
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
SIRIUS
VIDEO
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
V
V
This unit (rear) AV3~6(VIDEO)
jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital optical,
digital coaxial, analog stereo)
Any of AV3(COAXIAL) jack,
AV4(OPTICAL) jack,
AV5~6(AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on this unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI1~5 AV1 (OPTICAL)
AV4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI1~5 AV2~3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI1~5 AV5~6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1~2
Component video Analog stereo
AV1~2
(COMPONENT
VIDEO)
AV5~6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO1~2
DOCK NETWORK
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDI
O
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
SIRIUS
AM
AV 5
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
L
RL
R
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
YP
R
P
B
Y
AV2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
AV5 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
This unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9
En 28
1After connecting external devices (TV, playback devices, etc.) and
power cable of this unit, turn on this unit and TV.
2Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.
3Press ON SCREEN.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select “AV2” (video input jack to be used)
and press the cursor key ( ).
6Use the cursor keys to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
7Use the cursor keys to select “AV5” (audio input jack to be used).
8Press ON SCREEN.
Now the necessary setting is complete.
If you select “AV2” as the input source by pressing AV2, the video/audio played
back on the video device will be output from this unit.
Connecting audio devices (CD players, etc.)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to this unit. Depending on
the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following
connections.
If you select the input source by pressing AV1~6 or AUDIO1~2, the audio played back
on the audio device will be output from this unit.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on this unit
Digital optical AV1 (OPTICAL)
AV4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV2~3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV5~6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO1~2
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VI
D
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
(
MONITOR O
U
SIRIUS
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OO
CC
L
R
L
R
Audio output
(any of digital optical, digital coaxial,
analog stereo)
AV1~6 jacks
AUDIO1~2 jacks
This unit (rear)
Audio device
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9
En 29
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as a
game console and a camcorder to this unit.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume of
this unit.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from this unit.
• If you connect video devices to both the HDMI IN jack and VIDEO/AUDIO jacks, this unit outputs video/
audio input through the HDMI IN jack.
• To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover when the VIDEO AUX jacks are not in
use.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to this unit.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind the antenna cable from the AM antenna unit only the length needed.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
VIDEOHDMI IN L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
STRAIGHTTONE CONTROL
BD/DVD TV CD RADIO
YPAO MIC
USBPHONES
SILENT CINEMA iPod/iPhone
PROGRAM
VRL
HDMI
Game console
Camcorder
This unit (front)
5Connecting the FM/AM antennas
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
TRIGGER OUT
DOCK NETWORK
FM
AM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
SPEAKERS
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/BI–AMP
RL R
R
R
L
L
SINGLE
SIRIUS
+12V
0.1A MAX.
FM antenna
AM antenna
This unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5FM/AM antenna connections 6 7 8 9
En 30
Connect this unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on PCs and DLNA servers such as
Network Attached Storage (NAS) on this unit.
• When using a router that supports the DHCP function, the network parameters (IP address, etc.) will be
automatically assigned to this unit without configuring the network settings of this unit. If your router does
not support the DHCP function or you want to configure the network parameters manually, configure the
network settings (p.96).
• You can check whether the network parameters (IP address, etc.) are properly assigned to this unit in
“Network” (p.101) in the “Information”.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of your network devices (such as a
router) may block the access of this unit to the network devices or the Internet. In such cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• You can connect this unit to up to 16 music servers (PC, etc.), and each server must be connected to the
same subnet as this unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
6Connecting to the network
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
TRIGGER OUT
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HD
M
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
SIRIUS
+12V
0.1A MAX.
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
This unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 Network connections 7 8 9
En 31
Connecting video/audio recording devices
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks.
These jacks output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.
• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV5~6 jacks or V-AUX (VIDEO/
AUDIO) jacks of this unit.
• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV5~6 jacks, AUDIO1~2 jacks or V-
AUX (AUDIO) jacks of this unit.
Connecting a device compatible
with SCENE link playback (remote connection)
If you have a Yamaha product that has the capability of the SCENE control signal
transmission, you can control the Yamaha product in conjunction with a scene selection
(p.39) by connecting it to the REMOTE OUT jack with a monaural mini-jack cable.
• If you connect a Yamaha product compatible with SCENE link playback to the REMOTE OUT jack, you can
start playback on the Yamaha product in conjunction with a scene selection (p.39). To enable the SCENE
link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.83) in the “Scene” menu.
• You also connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to operate devices in the main zone from Zone2 (p.70).
7Connecting other devices
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
R
K
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5
A
V 4
(TV)
PTICAL
AV
OUT
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI
4
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
ZONE 2
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
FRONT CEN
T
RL
R
L
AUDIO
R
L
AUDIO
AUDIO
OUT
AV
OUT
VIDEO
VV
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
T
his unit
(rear)
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
Video recording device
Audio recording
device
Audio input
AUDIO OUT jacks
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
TRIGGER OUT
O
RK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
AV
OUT
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO
OUT
FRONT
RL
+12V
0.1A MAX.
IN
OUT
REMOTE
REMOTE
IN
This unit
(rear)
REMOTE OUT jack
Yamaha product
(DVD player, etc.)
Remote input
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Other connections 8 9
En 32
Connecting a device compatible
with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operations
(power-on/off, input selection, etc.) on this unit. If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to the TRIGGER OUT jack.
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output” (p.98) in the “Setup” menu.
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to this unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
TRIGGER OUT
O
RK
FMGND AM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4
(TV)
O
PTICAL
AV
OUT
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
AUDIO
OUT
FRONT
RL
+12V
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
+12V
0.1A MAX.
This unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT jack
System connection
input
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
8Connecting the power cable
AC IN
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
R RL L
D
MI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
ZONE 2
OUT
SUBWOOFER
A
UDIO
OUT
N
T CENTER SURROUND
L R L
SINGLE
This unit (rear)
To an AC wall outlet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Other connections 8Power cable connection 9
En 33
By using the Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO)
function, this unit automatically detects speaker connections and
distances from the listening position, and optimizes the speaker
settings such as volume balance and acoustic parameters to suit
your room.
Please note the following when using YPAO.
• Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to this unit.
• During the measuring process, the test tones are output at high volume. Take care
that the test tone does not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this
function at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
• During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
• During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
• Do not connect headphones.
• If your subwoofer supports the auto-standby function, disable it.
1Press RECEIVER to turn on this unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
the video from this unit.
3Turned on the subwoofer and set the volume to half.
If the cross-over frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
4Place the YPAO microphone at ear height in your
listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC
jack on the front panel.
9Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
This unit (front)
YPAO microphone
Listening position
Ear height
Place the YPAO microphone at ear
height in your listening position. We
recommend using a tripod to adjust the
height. You can use the tripod screws to
fix the microphone in place.
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
INF
O
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
RECEIVER
123456789Automatic speaker setup
En 34
The following screen appears on the TV.
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
• YPAO measurement is not performed correctly when any obstacles are in
the room.
• During the measuring process (about 3 minutes), keep stuff in the corners
or remove it from the room.
5To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
• To cancel the measurement, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.36) or “Warning messages” (p.37).
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.35).
6Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
7To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The corrected speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
8Disconnect the YPAO microphone from this unit.
Now optimization of the speaker settings is complete.
Caution
• Since the YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, do not place the microphone
in any place where it will be subjected to direct sunlight or high temperatures
(top of an AV equipment, etc).
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
123456789Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
En 35
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.88) in the “Setup” menu. In
this case, the previous measurement results are displayed.
The following screen appears.
1Measurement result items
2Measurement result details
2Use the cursor keys to select an item
• A speaker with any problem is indicated with a red-boxed message.
3To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup” and then “Result” (p.87).
2Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the
correct polarity (+/-).
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with
the reversed polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
12
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
ON SCREEN
123456789Automatic speaker setup
Cursor keys
En 36
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off this unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP Either of surround speakers is not detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP Either of presence speakers is not detected.
E-4: SBRSBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off this unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, the measurement starts again on the condition this unit ignores the noisy error even if noises
are detected.
E-6: Check Sur. Any surround back speaker is connected while no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers should be connected when using surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off this unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on this unit. If this error occurs repeatedly,
contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
123456789Automatic speaker setup
En 37
Warning messages
Even if any warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again to use this unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1: Out of Phase Any of the speaker cables may be connected with the
reversed polarity (+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.35) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker indicated with
“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off this unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly.
W-2: Over Distance Any of the speakers is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the
listening position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.35) and move the speaker indicated with “>24.0m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80
ft) of the listening position.
W-3: Level Error There are a significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Check the use environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer.
We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with as similar specifications as possible.
123456789Automatic speaker setup
En 38
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
MAIN
ZONE 2
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
RETURN
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DISPLAY
SOU
R
CE
MAI
N
ZO
NE 2
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
O
PTI
ON
TU
N.
/C
H
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
VOLUME
MUTE
ON SCREEN
PLAYBACK
1Turn on external devices (TV, BD/DVD player, etc.)
connected to this unit.
2Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3Start playback on the external device, or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual of the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
- Listening to FM/AM radio (p.45)
- Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio (p.48)
- Playing back iPod music/videos (p.54)
- Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.59)
- Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.61)
- Playing back music stored on PCs (p.64)
- Listening to Internet radio (p.67)
4Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust treble/bass parts of sound, use the “Option” menu or TONE
CONTROL on the front panel (p.77).
On-screen input selection
aPress ON SCREEN.
bUse the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
cUse the cursor keys to select a desired input source and press
ENTER.
Basic playback procedure
Input selection keys
Cursor keys
En 39
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
MAIN
ZONE 2
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
RETURN
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DISPLAY
MAI
N
ZO
NE 2
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
INF
O
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
SCENE
SOURCE/RECEIVER
ON SCREEN
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off at once.
1Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. This unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
On-screen scene selection
aPress ON SCREEN.
bUse the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
cUse the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
Configuring scene assignments
1Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
- Select an input source (p.38)
- Select a sound program (p.40)
- Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.44)
2Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
3If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/
RECEIVER blinks twice.
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device
yet, see “Setting the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.105) to
register it.
• You can also configure scene assignments in the “Scene” menu (p.82).
• You can start playback of external devices connected to this unit via HDMI
or a Yamaha product connected to the REMOTE OUT jack, in conjunction
with a scene selection (SCENE link playback). To enable the SCENE link
playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.83) in the “Scene”
menu.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings at once (SCENE)
SCENE Input Sound program Compressed Music
Enhancer
BD/DVD HDMI1 MOVIE (Drama) Off
TV AV4 STRAIGHT On
CD AV3 STRAIGHT Off
RADIO TUNER MUSIC
(7ch Stereo) On
Cursor keys
En 40
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
RETURN
VO
LUM
E
S
LEE
P
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DISPLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
This unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with a
favorite sound mode (sound field effect, stereo playback, etc).
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.41)
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo
playback (p.42)
Press MUSIC repeatedly.
Selecting a surround decoder (p.43)
Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
Switching to the straight decode mode (p.43)
Press STRAIGHT.
Switching to the Pure Direct mode (p.44)
Press PURE DIRECT.
Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.44)
Press ENHANCER.
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
aPress ON SCREEN.
bUse the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
ENTER.
cUse the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.84).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz
or DTS Express sources the straight decode mode (p.43) is automatically
selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound with the speaker
indicators on the front panel (p.9) or the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information”
menu (p.100).
Selecting the sound mode
Cursor keys
En 41
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)
This unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original
DSP technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room.
• When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources such as movies,
TV programs and games.
❑ MOVIE THEATER
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
Standard
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of an
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie
productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field that matches
cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range
providing everything from very small sound effects to large, impressive
sounds.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies. You can enjoy a
variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action
and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts
emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and
right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the
separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Sci-Fi
VOL.
SBL SBR
Sound program category
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing
effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words
and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after
long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a
classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program
produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to
create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and
studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the
voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the
center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimal space to
offer the listeners a feeling of presence in the stadium.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games such as car racing, fighting
games and FPS games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects
makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing
for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with
Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects and dialog from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer
for a more clear and spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop,
rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space
thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals
and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
En 42
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources such as
music CDs.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
❑ LIVE/CLUB
❑ STEREO
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in
Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for
European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,
creating a calming atmosphere. The listener's virtual seat is at the center left
of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates an approximately 1700-seat, middle-sized concert
hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate
carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the
listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a rock music live house in Los
Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener's virtual seat is at the
center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. When
multi-channel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilizes CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you playback
multi-channel sources, this unit down-mixes the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
En 43
■ Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
CINEMA DSP 3D enables to create a natural stereoscopic sound
field in your room.
CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions
are met.
- One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is
selected (p.41).
- “CINEMA DSP 3D MODE” (p.77) in the “Option” menu is set to
“On” (default).
• We recommend using presence speakers to have a full effect of the stereoscopic
sound fields. However, this unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the
front, center and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields even
when no presence speakers are connected.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, this unit
automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side
speakers.
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■ Enjoying unprocessed sounds in original
channels (straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, each speaker
produces each channel audio signal directly (without sound field
processing). When you play back 2-channel sources such as CD,
stereo sound is heard from the front speakers. When you play back
multi-channel sources, this unit produces unprocessed multi-
channel sounds.
1Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
■ Enjoying unprocessed multi-channel
sounds (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multi-channel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multi-channel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.117).
1Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
switches.
PL PR
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
3
Hall in Vienna
VOL.
SBL SBR
“CINEMA DSP ” lights up
3
Pro Logic Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for any
sources.
PLIIx Movie Uses the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
PLII Movie
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
STRAIGHT
VOL.
SBL SBR
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
VOL.
SBL SBR
ProLogic
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
En 44
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, this unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry to reduce the electrical
noise from other circuitry (front display etc). It allows you to enjoy
Hi-Fi sound quality.
1Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
- Selecting sound programs
- Adjusting the tone control
- Operating the on-screen menu
- Viewing information on the front display (when not operated)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer improves the sound enhancer near
to the original depth and width of compressed music sources. This
function can be used along with any other sound modes.
1Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
- Signals of which sampling rate is over 48kHz
- High-definition streaming audio
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.78) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects like a multi-channel
speaker system with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
PLIIx Music Uses the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.
PLII Music
PLIIx Game Uses the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.
PLII Game
Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
PUREDIRECT
SW
C
L
SLSR
ENHANCER
R
Enhancer On
VOL.
SBL SBR
“ENHANCER” lights up
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
En 45
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• If you cannot have a good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/
AM antennas.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2Press FM or AM to select a band.
3Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search the station
automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.5 MHz, press “9”, “8” and “5”.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
receivable range
• You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception by
pressing MODE. When signal reception for FM radio station is unstable,
switching to monaural may improve it.
Registering favorite radio stations (preset)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you
registered stations, you can easily tune into those stations by
selecting the preset number.
• You can automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals using “Auto
Preset” (p.47).
■ Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.45)
to tune into a desired radio station.
2Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The radio station will be registered to the preset number
“01” for the first time. After that, it will be registered to an
empty preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset
number).
• To select a preset number to which the station will be registered, press
MEMORY once after tuning into a desired radio station, use PRESET or
numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
Listening to FM/AM radio
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
FM87.5MHz
VOL.
SBL SBR
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
SBL SBR
FM98.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
VOL.
SBL SBR
Preset number
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
STEREO
TUNED
02:Empty
VOL.
SBL SBR
“Empty” (not in use) or frequency currently registered
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
TV
TV V
OL
T
V
C
H
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
INF
O
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
NET
US
B
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
MEMORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
MODE
TUNER
Numeric keys
En 46
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting the preset number.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.47).
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
1Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
2Band icon
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.
3TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
01:FM98.5MHz
PRESET
Menu Submenu Function
Manual Tuning
Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.
Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.
Memory Registers the selected station as
presets.
Direct Enters a frequency directly.
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
1
4
3
2
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
INF
O
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
T
V
C
H
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
PRESET
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
Numeric keys
En 47
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
■ Browse screen
1Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys to select a preset
station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2Preset number
3Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of
the list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 48
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect a SIRIUS Satellite
Radio tuner (sold separately) to your SIRIUS-Ready receiver.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from
categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz,
Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional
and college sports including play by play games from select
leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert
sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family
programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most
trusted sources.
Once you’ve purchased a SIRIUS tuner you’ll need to activate it
and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow
installation and setup instructions are provided with the SIRIUS
tuner. There are a variety of programming packages available,
including the option of adding “The Best of XM” programming to
the SIRIUS service. The “Best of XM” service is not available to
SIRIUS Canada subscribers at this time. Please check with SIRIUS
Canada for any updates using the numbers and web address
below.
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels
featuring content that may be inappropriate for children.
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers can call
1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit siriusxm.com (US) or
siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the SIRIUS
jack of this unit. For details, see the instruction manuals provided
with the SiriusConnect tuner.
• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of
the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window with no obstacles in
the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs
depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals provided with the
SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the antenna. You can mount it indoors or
outdoors.
• Use the antenna reception level information on the front display (p.51) or the TV
screen (p.51) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the
antenna.
• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to an AC wall outlet.
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
SIRIUS Radio Legal
SIRIUS and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the property of their
respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS subscription sold separately.
Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. SIRIUS tuner required (sold
separately) to receive the SIRIUS service. All programming and fees subject to
change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer,
hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software
incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio System.
Service not available in Alaska or Hawaii.
Note
• “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears when the connection
of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is incorrect. In this case, check the
connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna.
• “NOT SUPPORTED” appears when this unit does not support the connected
SiriusConnect tuner.
DOCK NETWORK
AM
ANTEN
N
PR
PB
Y
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL
OPTICAL
AV
OU
T
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI O
U
ARC
SIRIUS
SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna
(sold separately)
To an AC wall outlet
This unit (rear)
En 49
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
subscription
Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need to
activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To activate the
subscription, you need the SIRIUS ID which is uniquely assigned to
the SiriusConnect tuner. SIRIUS ID is 12-digit number which is
indicated on the package of the SiriusConnect tuner and on the
label of the SiriusConnect tuner. SIRIUS ID is also configured on the
front display when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel
“0”.
■ Displaying the SIRIUS ID of your
SiriusConnect tuner
1Press SIRIUS to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
2Press 0 and then ENT to display the SIRIUS ID.
About 3 seconds later, 12-digit SIRIUS ID appears on the
front display.
Write down the SIRIUS ID in the space provided below.
ID:____________________________________________
3Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate your
subscription.
Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATE” appears.
• “F/W UPDATE” appears when the SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
firmware.
• “UPDATING” appears when the SiriusConnect tuner is updating the channel
list.
• “SIRIUS LOADING” appears when this unit is communicating with the
SiriusConnect tuner.
Selecting a SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channel
• If any error message appears on the front display, see “Error indications for
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™” (p.115).
1Press SIRIUS to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
2Use the following keys to select a SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channel.
TUN./CH: Switches the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels
(All Channel Search). Hold down the key for quick search.
CATEGORY: Switches the channel categories. Hold down
the key for quick search. If you press TUN./CH within 10
seconds after selecting a category, you can switch the
channel within the selected category (Category Search).
Numeric keys: Enter a channel number directly. For
example, to select the channel 123, press “1”, “2” and “3”.
To specify a one-digit or two-digit channel number, enter
the channel number and then press ENT (or just leave it).
SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information
Contact for activation
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
SIRIUSVOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
PR
PL
SBL SBSBR
Xxxxxxxxxxxxx
ALL000:
SIRIUS ID
SIRIUSVOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
001XHitsX1
ALL
All Channel Search Channel number/name
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
XXXXXPop
CAT001:
SIRIUS
Category
Search Channel number Category name
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
E
R
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
ET
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
T
V
C
H
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
INF
O
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
HO
LD
0
ENT
CATEGORY
SIRIUS
TUN./CH
Numeric keys
En 50
• This unit skips the following channels during All Channel Search or Category
Search. This is not a malfunction.
- Channels that are not currently in service.
- Channels that you do not subscribe to.
- Channels that are locked (p.53).
• To listen to the locked channels (p.53), use the numeric keys to enter the channel
number directly or PRESET to select from the preset number, and then enter the
4-digit Parental Lock code number.
Registering favorite channels (preset)
You can register up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels as
presets. Once you registered channels, you can easily recall those
channels by selecting the preset number.
■ Registering a channel
Select a SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel and register it to a preset
number.
1Follow “Selecting a SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
channel” (p.49) to select a desired channel.
2Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The channel will be registered to the preset number “01” for
the first time. After that, it will be registered to an empty
preset number (next to the lastly-registered preset number).
• To select a preset number to which the channel will be registered, press
MEMORY once after selecting a desired channel, use PRESET or numeric
keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again (or
RETURN to cancel the registration).
■ Selecting a preset channel
Recall a registered channel by selecting the preset number.
1Press SIRIUS to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
2Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired
channel.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys.
• “PR Empty” appears when no channels are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.52).
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
P01:001XPreset
MEMORY
SIRIUS
Preset number Registered channel
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
P01:---X<<X001
MEMORY
SIRIUS
Channel to be registered
“---” (not in use) or channel currently registered
SIRIUSVOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
001XHitsX1
P01
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
T
V
C
H
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
INF
O
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
RETURN
SIRIUS
MEMORY
PRESET
Numeric keys
En 51
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
information
You can switch the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information displayed on
the front display.
1Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the item switches.
About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.
Operating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ on the TV
You can view the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information or select a
channel on the TV.
1Press SIRIUS to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
1HOLD indicator
Displays when the hold function is enabled.
2Current search mode (or preset number)
3Playback information
Displays the channel name, channel category, artist name, song title and
composer name.
Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled.
4Antenna reception level
5Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Channel Channel name
Category Channel category
Artist/Song Artist name, song title
Composer Composer name
Antenna Level Antenna reception level
DSP Program Sound program selected on this unit
Audio Decoder Decoder selected on this unit
SIRIUSVOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
AntennaXLevel
INFO
Item name
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SBR
XXX
ALL001:
SIRIUS
Channel number (always displayed)
Information
5
3
2
14
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
SIRIUS
INFO
Cursor keys
En 52
• You can also use HOLD on the remote control to enable/disable the hold function.
■ Browse screen
1Preset channel list
Displays the list of preset channels. Use the cursor keys to select a preset
channel and press ENTER to recall it.
2Preset number
3Antenna reception level
4Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu Submenu Function
Radio
Control
Channel (+/-)
Switches the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channels (All Channel Search). Hold down
the button for quick search.
Category (+/-)
Switches the channel categories. Hold
down the button for quick search. If you
press “Channel (+/-)” within 10 seconds
after selecting a category, you can switch
the channel within the selected category
(Category Search).
Memory Registers the selected channel as presets.
Direct Enters a frequency directly.
Hold
Enables/disables the hold function. When
the hold function is enabled, the playback
information (artist name, song title, etc.) will
remain displayed.
Parental Lock
Restricts access to specific channels. For
details, see “Restricting access to specific
channels (Parental Lock)” (p.53).
Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset
channel list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it. Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory Register the current channel to the preset
number selected in the list.
Clear
Preset Clear the preset channel selected in the list.
Clear All
Preset Clear all the preset channels.
1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
Parental Lock
Restricts access to specific channels. For
details, see “Restricting access to specific
channels (Parental Lock)” (p.53).
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
4
1
2
3
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
HOLD
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 53
■ Restricting access to specific channels
(Parental Lock)
You can restrict access to specific SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels
by setting a Parental Lock code number. The locked channel will be
skipped during All Channel Search or Category Search.
1In the playback screen or browse screen, select
“Parental Lock”.
2Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter a desired 4-
digit code number.
If you have already set the code number, enter it.
• To clear the entry, select “Clear”.
3Use the cursor keys to select “Enter” and press
ENTER.
The Parental Lock setting screen appears.
4Use the cursor keys to select a channel category
and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys to select a channel to be locked
and press ENTER.
Each time you press ENTER, the channel is locked or
unlocked.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To listen to a locked channel, use the numeric keys to enter the channel
number directly or PRESET to select from the preset number, and then
enter the 4-digit code number.
• If you forget the code number or want to change it, use “SR LOCK” (p.102)
in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to reset the code number.
Check mark
(locked)
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
INF
O
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
T
V
C
H
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
PRESET
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
Numeric keys
En 54
You can play back iPod music/videos on this unit using a USB cable supplied with iPod,
an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-12) or an optional Yamaha iPod
wireless system (YID-W10).
• This manual describes both the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” means both “iPod” and “iPhone”
unless the explanation describes exceptions.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or software version of an iPod, or the model
of an iPod dock.
Functional differences depending on the way of connection
* Requires an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied). Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the
Apple Composite AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of this unit and set “Video Out
(USB)” (p.81) in the “Input” menu to “V-AUX”.
Connecting an iPod
■ Using a USB cable
Connect your iPod to this unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
1Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
Playing back iPod music/videos
USB cable supplied
with iPod
Yamaha iPod universal
dock
(such as YDS-12)
Yamaha iPod wireless
system
(YID-W10)
Audio output ✓✓✓
Video output ✓*✓—
Operation with
remote control of
the unit
✓✓—
Operation with
iPod ✓✓✓
Operation on TV
screen ✓✓—
Charging ✓✓✓
Charging during
standby mode —✓✓
Supported iPod
iPod touch
iPod nano (2 gen. to
6 gen.)
iPod classic
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
iPod touch
iPod nano
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPod with color display
iPod with click wheel
iPod mini
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
iPod touch
iPod nano
iPod classic
iPod with video
iPhone 4
iPhone 3GS
iPhone 3G
iPhone
TONE CONTROL
BD/DVD
YPAO MIC
USBPHONES
SILENT CINEMA iPod/iPhone
INPUT
This unit (front)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
Connected
USB
En 55
■ Using an iPod dock
Refer to the instruction manual of the iPod dock in addition.
1When this unit is in standby mode, connect the iPod
dock to the DOCK jack.
Locate the iPod dock at the distance as far as from this unit.
2Connect your iPod to the iPod dock and turn on this
unit.
• While an iPod is connected to the iPod dock, the iPod is charged. You can
select whether to charge the iPod when this unit is in standby mode using
“Standby Charge” (p.80) in the “Input” menu.
■ Using an iPod wireless system
When using an iPod wireless system, operate your iPod itself to
start playback after making a connection. Refer to the instruction
manual of the iPod wireless system in addition.
1When the power cable is removed from an AC wall
outlet, connect the iPod wireless system (receiver)
to the DOCK jack.
Locate the iPod wireless system (receiver) at the distance
as far as from this unit.
2Connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
3Connect your iPod to the iPod wireless system
(transmitter).
4On your iPod, select the content and start playback.
This unit automatically turns on and selects “DOCK” as the
input source.
• You can select whether to control this unit (power on/off, input selection and
volume adjustment) in conjunction with iPod operations using “iPod
Interlock” (p.81) in the “Input” menu. When the iPod interlock function is
disabled, turn on this unit and select the input source manually.
• While the iPod wireless system (transmitter) is placed on the iPod wireless
system (receiver), the iPod is charged. You can select whether to charge the
iPod when this unit is in standby mode using “Standby Charge” (p.80) in the
“Input” menu.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI
2
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
SIRIUS
DOCK
This unit (rear)
iPod dock
Caution
• When you use iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to this unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, remove the iPod from the iPod
wireless system (transmitter) immediately. To prevent this problem, we
recommend using “Max Volume” (p.93) in the “Setup” menu to set the
maximum volume level for this unit.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
SIRIUS
DOCK
AB
123
This unit (rear)
iPod wireless system (receiver)
En 56
Playback of iPod contents
When using a USB cable or an iPod dock, you can control the iPod
with the menu displayed on the TV.
• When using an iPod wireless system, you cannot control the iPod from the TV
screen. Operate your iPod itself to select the content and start playback.
1When using a USB cable: press USB to select
“USB” as the input source.
When using an iPod dock: press DOCK to select
“DOCK” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
* Display example (when using an iPod dock)
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod itself to select a content or control playback, switch to
the simple play mode (p.57).
■ Browse screen
1Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.58) and playback status
(play/pause, etc).
2List name
3Contents list
Displays the list of iPod contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4Item number/total
5Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
5
4
3
2
1
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
DOCK
USB
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 57
■ Playback screen
1Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.58) and playback status
(play/pause, etc).
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled.
3Album image
4Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
Stops playback temporarily.
Skips forward/backward.
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
4
3
2
1
Operational remote control
keys Function
Cursor keys Moves to the browse screen.
ENTER Confirms the selection.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External
device
operation keys
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
Stops playback.
Skips forward/backward.
Searches forward/backward (while holding
down).
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
TV
TV V
OL
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
INF
O
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 58
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
• When using an iPod wireless system, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly
on your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod, or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1When “USB” or “DOCK” is selected as the input
source, press OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting and
press ENTER.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs
(Songs)
Plays back songs in random order. “ ”
appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order. “ ”
appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“ ” appears in the TV screen.
All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “ ”
appears in the TV screen.
1
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INF
O
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
OPTION
Cursor keys
En 59
You can play back music stored on a Bluetooth component on this
unit using a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as
YBA-10, optional). Refer to the instruction manuals of the Bluetooth
receiver and your Bluetooth component in addition.
This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of
the Bluetooth profile.
• When connecting your Bluetooth component to the Bluetooth receiver for the first
time, you need to perform “pairing” (mutual recognition for 2 Bluetooth
components). After that, you only need to establish a wireless connection between
those components to play back music via Bluetooth. “Pairing” must be performed
between each combination. So if you have several Bluetooth components, you
need to pair each of your Bluetooth components with the Bluetooth receiver.
Connecting a Bluetooth receiver
1When this unit is in standby mode, connect the
Bluetooth receiver to the DOCK jack.
Locate the Bluetooth receiver at the distance as far as from
this unit.
2Turn on this unit.
Pairing Bluetooth components
Be sure to perform pairing when connecting a Bluetooth
component to the Bluetooth receiver for the first time, or when the
pairing setting has been deleted.
• The Yamaha Bluetooth receiver (YBA-10) can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth
components. When the ninth component is paired, the pairing setting for the
component which has not been used for the longest period of time will be deleted.
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
1Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.
2Turn on your Bluetooth component and set it to the
pairing mode.
3Press OPTION, use the cursor keys to select
“Pairing” (Pairing), and then press ENTER.
Searching starts. If your Bluetooth component recognizes
the Bluetooth receiver, the model name (such as “YBA-10
YAMAHA”) will be displayed in the device list of your
component.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• You can also start the search by holding down MEMORY instead of step 3.
(To cancel the search, press MEMORY again.)
Playing back music via Bluetooth
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
+12V
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
SIRIUS
DOCK
This unit (rear)
Bluetooth receiver
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
PR
PL
SBL SBSBR
Searching...
DOCK
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
AUDI
O
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
DOCK
MEMORY
Cursor keys
En 60
4Select the Bluetooth receiver from the device list
and enter the pass key “0000”.
“Completed” appears when the pairing is complete.
• Depending on Bluetooth components, “BT connected” appears when the
pairing is complete. In this case, the wireless connection has been already
established. You just need to start playback on your Bluetooth component to
enjoy it on this unit.
5To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Establishing a wireless connection and
playing back
When the pairing is complete, follow the procedure below to
establish a wireless connection between your Bluetooth component
and the Bluetooth receiver. When the connection is established,
this unit outputs sounds played back on the Bluetooth component.
• Depending on Bluetooth components, a wireless connection is established
automatically or by operating the Bluetooth component. In this case, you can skip
steps 2 and 3 below.
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
1Press DOCK to select “DOCK” as the input source.
2Press OPTION.
3Use the cursor keys to select “Connect” (Connect)
and then press ENTER.
“BT connected” appears when the wireless connection is
established.
• If the Bluetooth receiver is paired with more than one Bluetooth component,
the lastly-connected component is automatically chosen. When you cannot
establish a connection with an intended component, perform pairing again
or perform the connection operation from the intended component.
• “Not found” appears if a connection cannot be established. Check the
followings and try again.
- The Bluetooth component and Bluetooth receiver are paired.
- The Bluetooth component is turned on and the Bluetooth mode is enabled.
- The Bluetooth component is within 10 m (32 ft) of the Bluetooth receiver.
4Start playback on your Bluetooth component.
• To terminate the wireless connection, select “Disconnect” (Disconnect) in
step 3.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
SBL SBR
Completed
DOCK
VOL.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
SBL SBR
BTconnected
DOCK
VOL.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
RETURN
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DISPLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
AUDI
O
INF
O
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
OPTION
DOCK
Cursor keys
En 61
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
this unit. Refer to the instruction manuals of the USB storage device
in addition.
This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT
32 format, except USB HDDs).
• This unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files.
• This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up to 96 kHz for WAV and
FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.
Connecting a USB storage device
1Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the
files. In this case, “Loading” appears in the front display.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
1Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by this unit are not listed.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts (p.72) and access them
directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
TONE CONTRO
L
YPAO MIC
USBPHONES
SILENT CINEMA iPod/iPhone
USB
This unit (front)
USB storage device
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
Connected
USB
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
INF
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Cursor keys
En 62
■ Browse screen
1Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.63) and playback status.
2List name
3Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4Item number/total
5Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
■ Playback screen
1Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.63) and playback status.
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled.
3Album image
4Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys ( , , , ) on the
remote control to control playback.
Menu Function
1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
5
4
3
2
1
Menu Submenu Function
Play
Control
Stops playback.
Skips forward/backward.
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
4
3
22
1
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
INF
O
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 63
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
• The shuffle/repeat settings are shared by USB and network sources.
1When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting and
press ENTER.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “ ” appears in
the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
Single
(Single)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“ ” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “ ” appears in the
TV screen.
1
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
Cursor keys
En 64
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-
compatible NAS on this unit.
• To use this function, this unit and your PC must be connected to the network
properly (p.30). You can check whether the network parameters (IP address, etc.)
are properly assigned to this unit in “Network” (p.101) in the “Information”.
• This unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files.
• This unit is compatible with sampling frequency of up to 96 kHz for WAV and
FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
Requirements
This unit can play back music files stored on the following music
servers.
- PC with Windows Media Player 11 or later installed
- PC with DLNA/UPnP certificate server software installed
- NAS with DLNA/UPnP certification
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed
1Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
2In the media sharing settings, enable the media
sharing and select this unit as a device to which the
media is shared.
■ For a NAS or a PC with other DLNA sever
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual of the device or software and
configure the media sharing setting.
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
1Press NET repeatedly to select “PC” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from this unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
Playing back music stored on PCs
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
RETURN
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DISPLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
INF
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
NET
Cursor keys
En 65
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by this unit are not listed (or cannot be selected even if
listed).
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts (p.72) and access them
directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.
■ Browse screen
1Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.66) and playback status
(play/pause).
2List name
3Contents list
Displays the list of PC contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4Album image
5Item number/total
6Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
■ Playback screen
1Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.66) and playback status
(play/pause).
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys to select information to be scrolled.
3Album image
4Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys ( , , , , ) on the
remote control to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.81).
Menu Function
1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
6
5
4
3
2
1
Menu Submenu Function
Play
Control
Resumes playback from pause.
Stops playback.
Stops playback temporarily.
Skips forward/backward.
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
4
3
2
2
1
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
INF
O
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 66
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of PC
music contents.
• The shuffle/repeat settings are shared by USB and network sources.
1When “PC” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting and
press ENTER.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “ ” appears in
the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
Single
(Single)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“ ” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “ ” appears in the
TV screen.
1
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
Cursor keys
En 67
You can listen to Internet radio stations using the vTuner Internet
radio station database service particularly customized for this unit,
providing a database of numerous radio stations in the world.
• To use this function, this unit must be connected to the Internet (p.30). You can
check whether the network parameters (IP address, etc.) are properly assigned to
this unit in “Network” (p.101) in the “Information”.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet radio stations may not be played.
1Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations as shortcuts (p.72) and
access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.
■ Browse screen
1Playback indicator
2List name
3Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio contents. Use the cursor keys to select
an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4Station art
5Item number/total
6Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Listening to Internet radio
Menu Function
Bookmark On Adds the station selected in the list to “Bookmark”.
1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up Moves to 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
6
5
4
3
2
1
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
En 68
• By adding your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmark”, you can access to
them quickly from “Bookmark”. To remove stations from “Bookmark”, select the
station in “Bookmark” and then “Bookmark Off”.
• You can also register your favorite Internet radio stations by accessing the
following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need
the vTuner ID of this unit and your e-mail address to create your personal account.
You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of this unit) in the “Network” screen
(p.101) in the “Information” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
■ Playback screen
1Playback indicators
2Playback information
Displays the station name and elapsed time.
3Station art
4Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• You can also use the external device operation keys ( , ) on the remote
control to control playback.
Menu Submenu Function
Bookmark On Adds the current station to “Bookmark”.
Play
Control Stops playback.
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
4
3
2
1
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
INF
O
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
En 69
The multi-zone function allows you to play back separate input
sources in the room where this unit is installed (main zone) and
another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching a TV in the living room (main
zone), another person can listen to radio in the bedroom (Zone2).
• Only analog audio signals (including radio, USB and network sources) can be
output to Zone2. To listen to playback sounds of an external device in Zone2, you
need to connect the device to the AUDIO jacks (AV5~6, AUDIO1~2 or VIDEO AUX
jacks) of this unit.
Preparing for Zone2
Connect devices to be set in Zone2 to this unit. The connection
method varies depending on an amplifier to use (this unit or
external amplifier).
■ Using the internal amplifier of this unit
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to this unit with speaker
cables.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, set “Power
Amp Assign” (p.90) in the “Setup” menu to “7ch +1ZONE” after
connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.71), the surround back speakers in the main
zone do not output sound.
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
Caution
• Remove the power cable of this unit from an AC wall outlet before connecting
speakers or an external amplifier.
• Be careful that the core of the speaker cable does not touch anything or come
into contact with the metal areas of this unit. This may damage this unit or the
speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “CHECK SP WIRES” will appear
on the front display when this unit is turned on.
Living room (main zone)
Bedroom (Zone2)
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
RRLL
SUBWOOFER
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
RL R L
SINGLE
This unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
En 70
■ Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 to this unit with a
stereo pin cable.
■ Operating this unit from Zone2
(remote connection)
By connecting an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the REMOTE
IN/OUT jacks of this unit, you can operate this unit and external
devices from Zone2 with the supplied remote control.
• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, register a remote
control code for each device in advance (p.104).
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
TRIGGER OUT
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6
V
5
AV
OUT
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
ZONE 2
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
FRONT CEN
RL
+12V
0.1A MAX.
ZONE2
OUT
L
R
AUDIO
L
R
This unit (rear)
ZONE2 OUT jacks
Zone2
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input (analog stereo)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
TRIGGER OUT
NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(TV)
VIDEO
AV 2
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIAL
AV
OUT
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDM
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
+12V
0.1A MAX.
This unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Infrared signal
transmitter
External device
(CD player, etc.)
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2
Main zone
En 71
Remote connections between Yamaha products
If you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections
like this unit, an infrared signal transmitter is unnecessary. You can
transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT
jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal
receiver.
Controlling Zone2
1Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2Press RECEIVER
Each time you press the key, Zone2 output is enabled or
disabled.
When Zone2 output is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the
front display.
3Use the following keys to select an input source.
V-AUX: VIDEO AUX (AUDIO) jacks (on the front panel)
AV5~6: AV5~6 (AUDIO) jacks
AUDIO: AUDIO1~2 jacks (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
DOCK: DOCK jack
TUNER: FM/AM radio
SIRIUS: SIRIUS jack
NET: NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired
network source)
USB: USB jack (on the front panel)
• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “PC” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main
zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “PC”.
4Start playback on the external device, or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual of the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
- Listening to FM/AM radio (p.45)
- Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ (p.48)
- Playing back iPod music (p.54)
- Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.59)
- Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.61)
- Playing back music stored on PCs (p.64)
- Listening to Internet radio (p.67)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
or web control (p.73) to control Zone2.
• To set the sleep timer (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), press SLEEP
repeatedly. The Zone2 output will be disabled after a specified period of
time.
• To adjust the Zone2 volume, press VOLUME or MUTE (available only when
using the internal amplifier of this unit).
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to 6, including this unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
MAIN
ZONE 2
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
PURE DIRE
CT
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
INF
O
HDMI
1
2
3
4
5
O
PTI
ON
TU
N.
/C
H
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
V-AUX
AV5~6
AUDIO
DOCK
TUNER
SIRIUS
NET
USB
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
RECEIVER
MAIN/ZONE2
En 72
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut
numbers.
• You can also use the “Bookmark” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.67).
■ Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
1Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
2Press MEMORY.
• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use
PRESET or numeric keys to select the shortcut number after step 2.
3To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
■ Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
1Press NET or USB.
2Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired item.
You can also enter a shortcut number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys.
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
- A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected
to this unit.
- A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to
the network.
- The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
- The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this
unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you
have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not
recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
Useful functions
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
01:Empty
MEMORY
Shortcut number (flashes)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
02:Empty
MEMORY
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
01:USB
RECALL
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
T
V
C
H
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
INF
O
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
MEMORY
PRESET
NET
USB
Numeric keys
En 73
Controlling this unit from the web browser
(web control)
You can control this unit with the web control screen displayed in
the web browser.
• To use this function, this unit and your PC must be connected to the network
properly (p.30).
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of this
unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• We recommend using Internet Explorer 7.x or 8.x as a web browser.
• If you set “Network Standby” (p.74) to “On”, you can display the web control
screen even when this unit is in standby mode.
• You can limit access to this unit from the network devices (PCs, etc.) with
the MAC address filter (p.74).
1Start the web browser.
2Enter the IP address of this unit in the address bar
of the web browser.
You can check the IP address in “Network” (p.101) in the
“Information” menu.
• By adding the IP address of this unit to the bookmark of the browser, you will
be able to open it without entering the IP address from the next time.
However, the IP address of this unit may change if you are using a DHCP
server.
■ Top menu screen
1CONTROL
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
2STATUS
Turns on/off the power for each zone, or displays the input source and
volume set for each zone.
3SETTINGS
Moves to the settings screen.
4SYSTEM POWER
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
5MAIN VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can
also switch the step for the volume adjustment.
6RELOAD
Reloads the current status of this unit.
Web browser
Web control
PC Router This unit
Web control
3
1
2
4
5
6
En 74
■ Control screen
1PLAY INFO
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
2TOP MENU
Moves to the top menu screen.
3SCENE
Select a scene for the main zone.
4POWER
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
5VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You
can also switch the step for the volume adjustment. (These functions are
available only when the internal amplifier of this unit is used.)
6RELOAD
Reloads the current status of this unit.
■ Settings screen
1Rename
Edits the friendly name (name for this unit in the network) or the name of
each zone (p.97). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to this unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.96) to limit access to this unit from the
network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to this unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On”
(enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of this unit every 5
seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.96).
Tips 1/ 2
Displays the tips for use of the web control.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Backup/Recovery
Creates backup of the settings of this unit on the PC, or restores the
settings from the backup.
2BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
3RELOAD
Reloads the current status of this unit.
2
14
3
5
62
1
3
En 75
Viewing the current status
■ Switching information on the front display
1Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the display item switches.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information
appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. Also, the
display item can be applied separately to each input source group.
■ Viewing the status information on the TV
1Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
2To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Note
• Do not operate this unit during the recovery process (restoring the settings).
Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. When the recovery
finishes, click “OK” to set this unit to standby mode.
• The backup does not contain user information (user account, password, etc.)
or unit-specific information (MAC address, IP address, etc).
Input source group Item
HDMI1~5
V-AUX
AV1~6
AUDIO1~2
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
TUNER Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
DSPProgram
INFO
Item name
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
TheRoxytheat
HDMI1
Information
SIRIUS
(SIRIUS Satellite
Radio)
Channel (channel name), Category (channel
category), Artist/Song (artist name/song title),
Composer (composer name), Antenna level
(antenna reception level), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
DOCK
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name) , DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name)
* When using iPod wireless system, Bluetooth
receiver, or during simple play:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
PC
USB
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name)
* When iPod is connected via USB, the display item
switches in the same manner as “DOCK”.
NET RADIO Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
Input
source
Audio
format/
Decoder
Volume
Sound
mode
CINEMA DSP status
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UT
E
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
INFO
DISPLAY
En 76
You can configure the playback-related settings in accordance with a playback source.
Since this menu is operational on the front panel (or on the TV screen), you can easily
configure the settings during playback.
1Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a setting and press ENTER.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
Configuring settings in accordance with a playback source (Option menu)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SBL SBR
ToneControl
OPTION Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of sounds. 77
Adaptive DRC
(Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum)
is adjusted automatically in conjunction with adjusting the
volume level.
77
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 77
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the vertical position of center sound when presence
speakers are used. 77
Extended Surround
(EXTD Surround)
Selects the 5.1 to 7.1-channel signal playback method
when surround back speakers are used. 78
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. 78
Enhancer
(Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 78
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.58), USB
storage device (p.63) or PC (p.66). —
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.58), USB
storage device (p.63) or PC (p.66). —
Connect/Disconnect
(Connect/Disconnect)
Establishes/terminates a wireless connection between your
Bluetooth component and the Bluetooth receiver. 60
Pairing
(Pairing)
Performs pairing of your Bluetooth component and the
Bluetooth receiver. 59
En 77
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of speaker
sounds. When connecting headphones, you can adjust high-frequency range and low-
frequency range of sounds output from headphones.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0db ~ Bypass (Bypass) ~ +6.0dB *0.5dB steps
Default
Bypass (Bypass)
• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
aPress TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
bPress PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is adjusted automatically in
conjunction with adjusting the volume level. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected,” the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume, and becomes
wide at a high volume.
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D
functions according to the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch
Stereo).
Settings
■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the vertical position of center sound such as dialogues when presence
speakers are used. If dialogues are heard from a position lower than the TV screen,
adjust this setting to raise the position.
Setting range
0~5 (higher raises the position)
Default
0
On (On) Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Off (Off) (default) Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
O
utput
l
eve
l
On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Ideal position
En 78
■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
Settings
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0dB ~ +6.0dB (0.5dB steps)
Default
0.0dB
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.44).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
Default
TUNER, DOCK, (network sources), USB: On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
Auto (Auto) (default)
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if a flag for
reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the
signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. When the DTS or DTS-HD signal is
input, the unit reproduces the signal in 7.1-channel regardless of a flag
for surround back channel.
PLIIx Movie
( PLIIxMo)
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
PLIIx Music
( PLIIxMu)
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder, and reproduces
signals in 6.1-channel.
Off (Off) Always reproduces signals in original channels.
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
En 79
CONFIGURATIONS
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key ( ).
The input source of this unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys ( / ) after step 3.
4Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 80
Audio In Combines the video jack of the selected input source
with an audio jack of others. 80
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 80
Standby Charge Selects whether to charge the iPod when this unit is in
standby mode. 80
iPod Interlock Selects whether to control this unit in conjunction with
iPod operations. 81
Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input
source. 81
DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital
Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 81
En 80
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
HDMI1~5, AV1~6, V-AUX, AUDIO1~2, USB, DOCK
■ Setup procedure
1Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an icon and press the cursor key ( ).
2Press ENTER, use the cursor keys to rename, and then press ENTER again.
3Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Audio In
Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For
example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output but not HDMI audio output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo jacks
(game consoles, etc.)
Input sources
HDMI1~5, AV1~2
■ Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV1” or “AV4”, and connect the device to the corresponding audio jacks of this
unit with a digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV2” or “AV3”, and connect the device to the corresponding audio jacks of this
unit with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1” or “AUDIO2”, and connect the device to the
corresponding audio jacks of this unit with a stereo pin cable.
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.
For example, if this unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
HDMI1~5, AV1~4, V-AUX
Settings
■ Standby Charge
Selects whether to charge the iPod connected to the iPod dock or iPod wireless system
when this unit is in standby mode.
Input sources
DOCK (iPod)
Settings
Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
On (default) Charges the iPod even when this unit is in standby mode.
Off Does not charge the iPod when this unit is in standby mode.
En 81
■ iPod Interlock
Selects whether to control this unit in conjunction with operations of the iPod connected
to the iPod wireless system.
Input sources
DOCK (iPod)
• This function is available only when an iPod wireless system is connected to this unit.
❑ Power & Input
Selects whether to control the power and input source selection of this unit in
conjunction with iPod operations.
Settings
• When “Power & Input” is set to “On”, the iPod connected to the iPod wireless system is charged regardless
of the “Standby Charge” setting (p.80).
❑ Volume
Selects whether to control the volume of this unit in conjunction with iPod operations.
Settings
■ Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Input sources
TUNER, Sirius Satellite Radio, (network sources), USB
Settings
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
PC
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of this unit from DMCs (Windows Media Player 12,
etc.) on the same network.
On (default)
Enables power and input interlocking controls. When you start
playback of the iPod, this unit turns on and “DOCK” is selected as the
input source. When you stop playback, this unit enters standby mode
after a short time.
Off Disables power and input interlocking controls.
On (default) Enables volume interlocking controls. When you adjust the iPod
volume, the volume of the unit is also adjusted.
Off Disables volume interlocking control.
Off (default) Does not output videos.
HDMI1~5, AV1~6,
V-AUX Outputs videos input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.
En 82
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.39) using the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a scene to be configured and press the
cursor key ( ).
• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys ( / ) after step 3.
4Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
■ Save
Registers the settings currently applied to this unit (input source, sound program/
surround decoder and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off) to the selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.39).
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
Item Function Page
Save Registers the settings currently applied to this unit to the
selected scene. 82
Load
Loads the settings registered to selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the
scene assignments.
83
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 83
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 83
En 83
■ Load
Loads the settings registered to selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
❑ Device Control
Enables to start playback of external devices connected to this unit via HDMI or a
Yamaha product connected to the REMOTE OUT jack, in conjunction with a scene
selection (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (CD): IR: Yamaha CD
SCENE4 (RADIO): Off
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.121).
❑ Detail
Displays the assignments of the selected scene.
■ Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an icon and press the cursor key ( ).
2Press ENTER, use the cursor keys to rename, and then press ENTER again.
3Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.39) for the selected scene.
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if
HDMI Control-compatible device (BD/DVD players, etc.) is connected
to this unit via HDMI. It also turns on the HDMI Control-compatible TV
concurrently.
IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1
Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this
if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.
IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 2
Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this
if a Yamaha BD/DVD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack and
“IR: Yamaha BD/DVD 1” does not work properly.
IR: Yamaha CD Enables SCENE link playback using remote control signals. Select this
if a Yamaha CD player is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack.
Input Input source to be used
Mode Sound program/surround decoder to be used
Enhancer Compressed Music Enhancer on/off
En 84
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key ( ).
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys ( / ) after step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (Sound Program menu)
En 85
Sound Program menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
■ Settings for sound programs
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
PLIIx Movie ( PLII
Movie), Neo:6 Cinema
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6dB ~ +3dB (default: 0dB)
Higher to enhance the
sound field effect and lower
to reduce.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1ms ~ 99ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect and lower to reduce.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation. 1ms ~ 49ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect and lower to reduce.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field. 0.1 ~ 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect and lower
to reduce.
Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field. 0 ~ 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity and lower to
reduce.
Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0s ~ 5.0s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and
lower to have clear sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and rear reverberant sound
generation.
0 ms ~ 250ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect and lower to reduce.
Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% ~ 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound and
lower to weaken.
Sound
program Item Function Settings
2ch Stereo Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the DSP
and tone control circuits when
an analog audio source is
played back.
Auto (default), Off
Select “Auto” to
bypass the circuits
(when both “Treble”
and “Bass” are set to
0dB).
7ch Stereo
Center Level Adjusts the volume of the
center channel.
0% ~ 100%
(default: 100%)
Surround L Level Adjusts the volume of the
surround left channel.
Surround R Level Adjusts the volume of the
surround right channel.
Surround Back Level Adjusts the volume of the
surround back channel.
0% ~ 100%
(default: 50%)
Surround Back L
Level
Adjusts the volume of the
surround back left channel. 0% ~ 100%
(default: 35%)
Surround Back R
Level
Adjusts the volume of the
surround back right channel.
Front Presence L Level
Adjusts the volume of the front
presence left channel. 0% ~ 100%
(default: 33%)
Front Presence R Level
Adjusts the volume of the front
presence right channel.
Item Function Settings
En 86
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “Surround Decoder”
to “PLIIx Music” or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type Item Function Settings
PLIIx Music
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off (default), On
Select “On” to wrap front right/left
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 ~ 7 (default: 3)
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect and lower to reduce (closer
to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 ~ +3 (default: 0)
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to
strengthen the surround sound
field.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 ~ 1.0 (default: 0.3)
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
En 87
You can configure the various functions of this unit using the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select a menu.
4Use the cursor keys
(/)
to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En 88
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Optimizes the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). 33
Manual Setup
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 90
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 90
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 90
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and its size. 90
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and its size. 91
Front Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected. 91
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 91
Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 91
Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component produced from speakers of which the size is set to “Small”. 91
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 91
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 92
Parametric EQ PEQ Select Selects a type of equalizer to be used. 92
PEQ Data Copy Copies the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment. 92
Test Tone Enables/disabled the test tone output. 92
Sound
Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. 93
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 93
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume so that sound is not too loud. 93
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 93
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level in conjunction with volume adjustments. 93
Video Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks. 94
Processing Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 94
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (ARC, TV audio input, etc). 95
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio (input through HDMI jacks). 95
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when this unit is in standby mode. 96
Network
IP Address Configures the network parameters (IP address, etc). 96
Network Standby Selects whether or not to turn on this unit by the command from other network devices. 96
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to this unit from other network devices. 96
En 89
Multi Zone Zone2 Set Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume so that sound is not too loud. 97
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when this unit is turned on. 97
Zone Rename Changes the zone names displayed on the TV screen. 97
Function
Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for auto-standby. 97
Display Set
Front Panel Display Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 98
Scroll Sets the scrolling manner of the front display. 98
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when this unit is operated. 98
Wall Paper Selects a wall paper displayed on the TV. 98
Trigger Output
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 98
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized. 98
Target Source Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input switching. 99
Manual Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually. 99
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 99
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 99
Menu Item Function Page
En 90
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations
are possible using the presence speakers, Zone2 speakers or bi-amp connection.
Settings
■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm or
larger or “small” if it is smaller than 16 cm.
❑ Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
❑ Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
❑ Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and its size.
Settings
Basic (default) Select this when you use a normal speaker system (not to use Zone2
speakers or bi-amp connection).
7ch+1ZONE Select this when you use Zone2 speakers (p.69) in addition to the
speaker system in the main zone.
5ch BI-AMP Select this when you connect front speakers that support bi-amp
connections (p.19).
Large
Select this for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Large
Select this for large speaker.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this for small speaker.
The subwoofer will produce center channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None Select this when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Large
Select this for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small (default)
Select this for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce surround channel low-frequency
components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
En 91
❑ Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and its size.
Settings
❑ Front Presence
Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected.
Settings
❑ Subwoofer
Selects whether or not subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Settings
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
❑ Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None” or “Front” is set to “Small”.
❑ Bass Cross Over
Sets the lower limit of low-frequency component produced from speakers of which the
size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be
produced from the subwoofer or front speakers
Settings
40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (default), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
• If the volume and cross-over frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and cross-
over frequency to maximum.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front
Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30m ~ 24.00m (1.0ft ~ 80.0ft) *0.05m (0.2ft) steps
Default
3.00m (10.0ft)
Large x1
Select this when 1 large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Large x2
Select this when 2 large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Small x1
Select this when 1 small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer will produce surround back channel low-frequency
components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Small x2
(default)
Select this when 2 small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer will produce surround back channel low-frequency
components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce
surround back channel audio.
Use (default) Select this when presence speakers are connected.
None Select this when no presence speakers are connected.
Use
Normal
(default)
Select this when a subwoofer is connected (not to reverse the phase).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this when a subwoofer is connected (reverse the phase). The
subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.
Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel low-
frequency components.
En 92
■ Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front
Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0dB ~ +10.0dB (0.5dB steps)
Default
0.0dB
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts sound quality of tone with an equalizer.
❑ PEQ Select
Selects a type of equalizer to be used.
Settings
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front” and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.33).
❑ PEQ Data Copy
Copies the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.33) to the
“Manual” fields for fine adjustment.
Choices
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Band / Gain:
You can select a center frequency from the preset 7 bands and adjust the gain.
Freq. / Gain: You can adjust the center frequency of the selected band and adjust the gain.
Q / Gain: You can adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and adjust the gain.
Clear: Restores the default settings for the selected speaker.
4Use the cursor keys to adjust parameters and press ENTER.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0dB ~ +6.0dB (0.5dB steps)
Center frequency: 31.3Hz ~ 16.0kHz
Q factor: 0.500 ~ 10.08
5To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Test Tone
Enables/disabled the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Manual Select this when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the characteristics same as the
front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
Flat > Manual Copies the “Flat” values acquired with “Auto Setup”.
Front > Manual Copies the “Front” values acquired with “Auto Setup”.
Natural > Manual Copies the “Natural” values acquired with “Auto Setup”.
Off (default) Does not output test tones.
On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance,
equalizer, etc.
En 93
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
❑ Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to this unit via HDMI. If necessary,
you can fine-adjust the audio output timing. “Offset” shows the difference between
automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
Setting range
0ms ~ 250ms (1ms steps)
Default
0ms
❑ Manual
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
Setting range
0ms ~ 250ms (1ms steps)
Default
0ms
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume so that sound is not too loud.
Setting range
-30.0dB ~ +15.0dB (5.0dB steps), +16.5dB
Default
+16.5dB
■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level in conjunction with
volume adjustments.
Settings
Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range to make clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off (default) Sets at the level when this unit last entered standby mode.
On Sets at Mute, or -80.0dB ~ +16.5dB (0.5dB steps). (This setting works
only when “Max Volume” is set higher.)
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically.
En 94
Video
Configures the video output settings.
■ Analog to Analog Conversion
Enables/disables the video conversion (p.120) between the analog video jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO).
Settings
• This unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
• 480p/576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals cannot be output from the VIDEO jacks (p.120).
■ Processing
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
• 720p-, 1080i- and 1080p-resolution video signals cannot be converted (p.120).
❑ Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Processing” is set to “On”.
Settings
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MON.CHK” (p.103) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that output videos may not be displayed on your
TV normally.)
❑ Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Processing” is set to “On”.
Settings
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i or 1080p
signals.
Off Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.
On (default) Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.
Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks only.
Off (default) Disables the video signal processing.
On Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV
resolution.
480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either
side of the screen.
En 95
HDMI
Configures the settings related to HDMI.
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.121).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.121) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑ TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of this unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”.
The input source of this unit automatically switches to TV audio (input jack selected in
here) when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AV1~6, AUDIO1~2
Default
AV4
• When using ARC to input TV audio to this unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected in here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
❑ ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.21) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to this unit because TV audio signals input to this unit via ARC are not supported by this unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV speaker.
❑ Standby Sync
Select whether to set this unit to standby in conjunction with TV power-off when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
■ Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio (input through HDMI jacks).
• The “Audio Output” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
❑ Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to this unit.
Settings
❑ HDMI OUT (TV)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and
“Standby Sync”.
Off Disables ARC.
On (default) Enables ARC.
Off Does not set this unit to standby mode in conjunction with TV
power-off.
On Sets this unit to standby mode in conjunction with TV power-
off.
Auto (default) Sets this unit to standby mode in conjunction with TV power-off
only when this unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers.
Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
En 96
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when this
unit is in standby mode.
Settings
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Network
Configures the network settings.
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (IP address, etc).
❑ DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
❑ Manual Setup
Configures the network parameters of this unit manually when “DHCP” is set to “Off”.
Submenu
■ Network Standby
Selects whether to turn on this unit by the command from other network devices
(network standby).
Settings
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to this unit from other network devices.
❑ Mode
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
❑ Address Setup
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to this unit when “Mode” is set to “On”.
Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(This unit consumes approximately 3 W of power.)
Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually.
On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the network parameters (IP
address, etc.) of this unit.
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off (default) Disables the network standby function.
On Enables the network standby function.
(This unit consumes approximately 5 W of power.)
Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “Address Setup”, specify the MAC
addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to this
unit.
En 97
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Zone2 Set
Configures the audio output settings for Zone2.
• The “Zone2 Set” settings are available only when “Power Amp Assign” (p.90) is set to “7ch+1ZONE”
❑ Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume so that sound is not too loud.
Setting range
-30.0dB ~ +15.0dB (5.0dB steps), +16.5dB
Default
+16.5dB
❑ Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when this unit is turned on.
Settings
■ Zone Rename
Changes the zone names displayed on the TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1Use the cursor keys to select a zone to be renamed and press ENTER.
2Press ENTER, use the cursor keys to rename, and then press ENTER again.
3Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Function
Configures the functions that make this unit easier to use.
■ Auto Power Down
Sets the amount of time for auto-standby. If you do not operate this unit for the specified
time, this unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Settings
Off (default) Sets at the level when this unit last entered standby mode.
On Sets at Mute, or -80.0dB ~ +16.5dB (0.5dB steps).
(This setting works only when “Max Volume” is set higher.)
Off (default) Does not set this unit to standby mode automatically.
4 Hours, 8 Hours,
12 Hours
Sets this unit to standby mode when you have not operated this unit for the
specified time.
En 98
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
❑ Front Panel Display
Configures the front display settings.
Dimmer
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 ~ 0 (higher to brighten)
Default
0
Scroll
Sets the scrolling manner of the front display.
The display scrolls automatically if the text exceeds 14 characters.
Settings
❑ Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when this unit is operated
(input selection, volume adjustment, etc).
Settings
❑ Wall Paper
Selects a wall paper displayed on the TV.
Settings
■ Trigger Output
Sets the TRIGGER OUT jack to function synchronized with power status of each zone or
input switching.
❑ Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
❑ Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized.
Settings
Continue (default) Sets the display to scroll continuously.
Once Sets the display to scroll all characters once and then halt scrolling for
display of the first 14 characters.
On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Picture1, Picture2, Picture3 Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there
is no video signal.
Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there
is no video signal.
Power (default) The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone.”
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions synchronized with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone.”
Electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Target
Source.”
Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual.”
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone2.
All (default)
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source,” electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
En 99
❑ Target Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input switching
when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
HDMI1~5, AV1~6, V-AUX, AUDIO1~2, TUNER, Sirius Satellite Radio, (network sources), USB,
DOCK
Settings
❑ Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of
the external component connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
■ Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High (default) Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.
Off (default) Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
English (default) English
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Français
Deutsch
Español
En 100
You can view information about this unit using the TV screen.
1Press ON SCREEN.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys ( / ) to select an information type.
4To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Types of information
■ Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
• Even when this unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on
the specifications and settings of the playback device.
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
Viewing information about this unit
(Information menu)
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal (front/
surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front
channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks (analog)
HDMI Error
Errors related to HDMI
HDCP Error: The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection).
Device Over: The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is
over the limit.
En 101
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
■ Network
Displays the network information on this unit.
■ System
Displays the system information on this unit.
• If this unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the firmware of this unit by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in
“Updating the firmware of this unit” (p.107).
■ Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
You can configure the system settings of this unit using the front display.
1Set this unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the font panel, press MAIN ZONE
.
3Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5Press MAIN ZONE to set this unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
The new settings become effective.
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address MAC address
Status Network connection status
Remote ID The remote control ID setting of the main unit (p.102)
TV Format The video signal type setting of this unit (p.102)
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of this unit (p.102)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on this unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2
Volume The volume setting for Zone2
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
MAIN ZONE
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
En 102
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
Change the speaker impedance settings of unit depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Select the remote control ID of the main unit so that it matches to the ID of the remote
control (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each
remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
1Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
2Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
3Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
If it blinks 6 times, registration failed. Repeat from step 1.
• The registered remote control codes (p.104) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
Resetting the Parental Lock code number (SR LOCK)
Reset the Parental Lock code number for SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
Choices
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of this unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC (default), PAL
Item Function Page
SP IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 102
REMOTE ID Selects the remote control ID of the main unit. 102
SR LOCK Resets the Parental Lock code number for SIRIUS
Satellite Radio. 102
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 102
MON.CHK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 103
INIT Restores the default settings. 103
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 103
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on
this unit. 103
6 Ω MIN Select this when you connect 6-ohm speakers to this unit. You can also
use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 Ω MIN (default) Select this when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to this unit.
SPIMP.-8MIN
REMOTEID-ID1
RESET Resets the Parental Lock code number.
CANCEL Does not perform a reset.
SIRIUSVOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
MUTE
PR
PL
SBL SBSBR
SRXLOCK-CANCEL
TVFORMAT-NTSC
En 103
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MON.CHK)
This unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jacks.
If you want to select a resolution in “Resolution” (p.94) regardless of the detection
results or if this unit does not detect it correctly, disable the monitor check function.
Settings
• In case this unit becomes inoperable because videos from this unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
“MON.CHK” is set to “SKIP”, reset the setting to “YES”.
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the selected item.
Choices
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware will be released irregularly for the purpose of additional features or
product improvements. It can be downloaded from our website. If this unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the
information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start
firmware update.
Choices
• If this unit detects a newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the firmware of this unit by following the
procedure in “Updating the firmware of this unit” (p.107).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on this unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.101) in the “Information” menu.
YES (default) Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for this unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
MON.CHK-YES
INIT-CANCEL
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
MUTE
PR
PL
SBL SBSBR
UPDATE-USB
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
MUTE
PR
PL
SBL SBSBR
VERSION-x.xx
En 104
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
MAIN
ZONE 2
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
MUTE
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
M
O
D
E
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
MAI
N
ZO
NE 2
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
TV
SOURCE/RECEIVER
CODE SET
By setting the code for external devices (BD/DVD players, etc.),
you can operate it with the remote control of this unit.
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
• Make sure the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the registered
codes may be cleared. In this case, insert new batteries and setting the codes
again.
• When HDMI control of both this unit and playback device such as a BD/DVD
player are enabled, you may be able to control the device with the remote control
without registering the remote control code.
Setting the remote control code for a TV
By setting the remote control code for your TV, you can operate it
with the remote control of this unit.
• You can also register a remote control code of your TV to the input selection keys
(p.105). In this case, you can use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the
TV depending on its model. However, you need to press the corresponding input
selection key to play back TV audio on this unit.
1Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find a remote control code for your TV.
• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it
does not work then try the other codes.
2Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat
from step 2.
3Press TV
4Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is set successfully,
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
If it blinks 6 times, registration failed. Repeat from step 2.
■ TV operations
Once you have set the remote control code for your TV, you can
control it using the TV operation keys regardless of an input source
selected on this unit.
Controlling external devices with the remote control
TV operation keys
INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.
MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
TV CH Switch the channels of the TV
TV Turns on/off the TV.
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
En 105
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
MAIN
ZONE 2
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
MUTE
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
S
UR. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE M
US
I
C
BD
D
V
D
TV
CD
RADI
O
MU
TE
M
O
D
E
D
MAIN
ZO
NE 2
INF
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
T
UN.
/C
H
FM
A
M
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
DISPLAY
SOURCE
SOURCE/RECEIVER
CODE SET
Setting the remote control codes for
playback devices
By setting the remote control codes for your playback devices, you
can operate those devices with the remote control of this unit. Since
the codes are assigned to each input source key, you can select
the input source and device to control with the remote control
concurrently.
• At the factory, Yamaha CD player code (5095) is set for AV3. For the other input
selection keys, no codes are set.
1Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find a remote control code for your playback
device.
• If multiple remote control codes exist, first set the first code in the list, if it
does not work then try the other codes.
2Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat
from step 2.
3Press a corresponding input selection key.
For example, press HDMI1 to set the remote control code
for the playback device connected to the HDMI1 jack.
4Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully,
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
If it blinks 6 times, registration failed. Repeat from step 2.
• For details on how to register the input selection key applied the remote
control code on a corresponding SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene
assignments” (p.39).
■ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (this unit or
external device) to operate with the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric
keys. You can operate this unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange,
and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.
For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate FM/AM radio built in this unit when SOURCE/
RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when SOURCE/
RECEIVER lights up in green.
• These keys work only when the corresponding function is available on your
playback device and is possible to be operated with an infrared remote control.
SOURCE Turns on/off the playback device.
Menu operation
keys
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
DISPLAY Switches information on the display.
External device
operation keys
TOP MENU Displays the top menu.
POP-UP MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
Stops playback.
Stops playback temporarily.
Starts playback of the selected song/
video.
Search forward/backward (by holding
down).
Skip forward/backward.
Numeric keys Enter numerical values.
TV operation keys Control the TV (p.104).
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
External device
operation keys
Menu operation keys
Input selection key
En 106
Resetting remote control codes
You can clear all remote control codes and restore the default
settings.
• The settings for controlling playback devices after selecting a scene (p.39) will be
also cleared.
1Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. In this case, repeat
from step 1.
2Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
3Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
Once the remote control codes are reset successfully,
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
If it blinks 6 times, resetting failed. Repeat from step 1.
SCENE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
CD
RADIO
MUTE
7856
90
10
1234
MODE
ENT
TV
TV VOL TV CH
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
MAIN
ZONE 2
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
T
V
C
H
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DI
S
PLAY
MAI
N
ZO
NE 2
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
SOURCE/RECEIVER
CODE SET
Numeric keys
En 107
If this unit is connected to the Internet, the corresponding message
will be displayed on the TV when a newer firmware is available. In
this case, follow the procedure below to update the firmware of this
unit.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.103).
If the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed,
firmware update is available.
1Read the on-screen description.
2To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE
on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in step 2. In this
case, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information”
and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in the
“System” screen (p.101). You can update the firmware of this unit by
pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Updating the firmware of this unit
Note
• Do not operate this unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 15 minutes.
Information
icon
Message
System icon
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
SLEEP PURE DIRECT
HDMI
AV
1234
V-AUX
5
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD TV
CD
RADIO
MUTE
ENTER
56
90
1234
MODE
TV
TV VOL
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
RECEIVER
CODE SET
INPUT
DOCK
AUDIO
OPTION
ON SCREEN
5
1234
6
TUNER NET USB
TUN./CH
SIRIUS
HOLD
FM AM
CATEGORY
SC
ENE
RETURN
VO
LUM
E
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
S
TRAI
G
H
T
ENHAN
C
ER
S
LEE
P
PURE DIRE
CT
HDMI
AV
1
2
3
4
V
-A
UX
5
INF
O
MEM
O
R
Y
PRE
S
E
T
MO
VIE MU
S
I
C
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADI
O
M
UTE
5
6
9
0
1
2
3
4
M
O
D
E
TV
TV V
OL
TO
P
M
ENU
P
O
P-U
P
MENU
DISPLAY
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
INPUT
D
OC
K
AUDI
O
O
PTI
ON
O
N
SC
REE
N
5
1
2
3
4
6
TUNER
NET
US
B
TU
N.
/C
H
S
IRI
US
HO
LD
FM
AM
C
ATE
GO
R
Y
ENTER
Cursor keys
En 108
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the
speaker settings again (p.33). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use
“Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.90).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child, etc. accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote
control, the volume may suddenly increase. And this may cause injury or damage this
unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
maximum volume level for this unit in advance (p.93). You can also set the maximum
volume for Zone2 (p.97).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden large sound when
turning on this unit...
By default, the volume level when this unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” to set the volume to be
applied when this receiver is turned on (p.93). You can also set the initial volume for
Zone2 (p.97).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.121). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (TV, BD/DVD players, etc.) to this unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time when you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to
your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and
playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals of each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when this unit is operated
(input selection, volume adjustment, etc). In case that the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.98) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on this unit (speaker settings, etc.) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.99).
The web control screen (p.73) becomes inaccessible...
If you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of this unit may change each time this
unit is turned on. Check the IP address of this unit in “Network” (p.101) in the
“Information” menu. Also, if you have enabled “MAC Address Filter” (p.96), you need to
specify the MAC address of your PC in “Address Setup” (p.96) to allow the PC to
access this unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to
the instruction manuals of it.
The supplied remote control concurrently controls this unit and
another Yamaha product that is not intended...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the supplied remote control may work on
another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on this unit. In this case,
set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver
(p.102).
Frequently asked questions
En 109
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below, or if the instructions below do not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the followings:
aThe power cables of this unit, TV and playback devices (BD/DVD player, etc.) are connected to AC outlets securely.
bThis unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (BD/DVD player, etc.) are turned on.
cThe connectors of each cable are inserted to jacks on each devices securely.
Power and system
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated 3 times consecutively. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning and excessive static electricity) or by a
drop in power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot this unit.
The power turns off (standby mode)
immediately. This unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to this unit and
speakers (p.19).
The unit enters
standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
Since this unit was not operated for the specified time, auto-
standby worked.
To disable auto-standby, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu to “Off”
(p.97).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.102).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to this unit and
speakers (p.19).
This unit is uncontrollable.
The internal microcomputer is hung-up due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning and excessive static electricity) or by a
drop in power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot this unit.
En 110
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys
Signals that this unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on this unit. To check the
audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information menu”
(p.100).
The cable connecting this unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.93).
Any device connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned
on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of this unit
No sound is heard from a specific
speaker.
The playback source does not contain corresponding channel
signals. To check it, select “7ch Stereo” (p.40).
The sound program/decoder currently selected does not use the
corresponding speaker. To check it, select “7ch Stereo” (p.40).
Audio output of the corresponding speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.33) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker setting (p.90).
The volume of the corresponding speaker is too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.33) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.92).
The speaker cable connecting this unit and corresponding
speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The corresponding speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replacing with another speaker. If the problem persists, this unit may
be malfunctioning.
No sound is heard from the surround
back speaker. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.78).
No sound is heard from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, to output the front
channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.91).
Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.33) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.91).
The subwoofer is turned off by the auto-standby function on it. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device
(connected to this unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection). To check it, use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.100).
This unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.95).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
En 111
Video
No sound from the TV (when HDMI
Control is used).
(If the TV is connected to this unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.95).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on this unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.95). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multi-
channel audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (PCM, etc.)
only. Change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency device. Move this unit further away from such device.
The cable connecting this unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted. Any device connected to the output jacks of this unit is not turned
on. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of this unit
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on this unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.
The video signal output from this unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MON.CHK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.103).
The cable connecting this unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device
(connected to this unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by this unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.100). For information about video signals
supported by this unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.122).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection). To check it, use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.100).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the
limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 112
FM/AM radio
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.45).
Use an outdoor FM antenna commercially available. We recommend using a
sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna commercially available.
Radio stations cannot be selected
automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.45).
Use an outdoor antenna commercially available. We recommend using a
sensitive multi-element antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.45).
Use an outdoor AM antenna commercially available. Connect it to the ANTENNA
(AM/GND) jack together with the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered
as presets. “Auto Preset” has been used. “Auto Preset” is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.45).
Problem Cause Remedy
This unit does not detect the USB
device.
The USB cable connecting this unit and USB device is not
compliant with USB 2.0. Use a USB cable compliant with USB 2.0.
Folders and files in the USB device
cannot be viewed. The folder structure not supported by this unit is applied.
This unit supports folder hierarchies of up to 8 levels and up to 500 items (total of
files and subfolders) per folder. If necessary, modify the folder structure on your
USB device.
The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) is not obtained properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on this unit (p.96). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, make sure using an IP address which is not used by other network
devices in your network (p.96).
This unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select this unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.64).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of this unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
This unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and the settings of your router to connect them to
the same network.
En 113
Remote control
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or
played back. The files are not supported by this unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both this unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by this unit, see “Playing back music
stored on PCs” (p.64).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
It may not be available to listen because there might be a network problem, or the
station might be broadcasting in limited hour. Try the station later or select another
station.
The selected Internet radio station broadcasts audio silence
currently.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast audio silence during particular periods of
time in a day. Try the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (router, etc).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number is variable depending on radio station.
Problem Cause Remedy
This unit cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
Out of the operating range. Use the remote control in the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
Direct sunlight or lighting is striking the remote control sensor of
this unit. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition this unit.
The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER/SOURCE to set the remote control to control this unit (the key
lights up in orange).
The remote control IDs of the main unit and remote control are not
identical. Change the remote control ID of the main unit or remote control (p.102).
External devices cannot be controlled
using the remote control.
The remote control is set to control this unit. Press RECEIVER/SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices
(the key lights up in green).
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.104). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly set, some products may not respond to the remote control.
Problem Cause Remedy
En 114
Error indications on the front display
Message
(alphabetical order) Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing setting and select this unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.64).
Access error
This unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
This unit cannot access the iPod connected to the USB jack. Turn off the iPod and turn on it again.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to this unit. Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between this unit and your router (or hub) (p.30).
No device This unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
This unit cannot detect the iPod connected to the USB jack. Turn off the iPod and turn on it again.
Not found The Bluetooth component is not found.
(When pairing)
Turn on the Bluetooth component and set it in pairing mode.
(When establishing a wireless connection)
- Turn on the Bluetooth component.
- Place the Bluetooth component within 10 m (32 ft) of the Bluetooth receiver.
- Perform pairing again.
Unknown iPod The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by this unit (p.54).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reasons.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by this unit. For information about the
formats supported by this unit, see “Playing back music stored on PCs” (p.64). If this unit cannot play
back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.
USB Overloaded Over current passes through the USB device. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
En 115
Error indications for SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
Message
(alphabetical order) Cause Remedy
ACQUIRING SIG The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner by checking the antenna reception level
displayed in the front display (p.51) or TV (p.51).
ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the SiriusConnect tuner properly. Check the connection of the antenna and SiriusConnect tuner (p.48).
CALL SIRIUS The selected channel is not currently subscribed.
To subscribe the selected channel, contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
CHECK SR TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to this unit or AC wall
outlet properly.
Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and this unit or AC wall outlet (p.48).
SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet.
INVALID CH The selected channel is currently out of service. Try another channel.
NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio
tuner. Use the SiriusConnect tuner supported by this unit.
En 116
Use this diagram as guide. You do not need to adjust the speaker layout to the following diagram exactly.
Ideal speaker layout
60°
60°
80°80°
30 cm (1 ft) or more
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
Turn it slightly inward to
reduce wall reflections.
Front speaker (L)
Front speaker (R)
Center speaker
Surround speaker (L)
Surround speaker (R)
Presence speaker (L)
Presence speaker (R)
Surround back speaker (L)
Surround back speaker (R)
Subwoofer
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
En 117
Audio information
Audio and video synchronization (Lipsync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem, and the capability of
maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustment, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an
automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and
accurately without user interaction.
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a
loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each
amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler
job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way.
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in
a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material,
number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that is heard.
Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha’s original DSP technology to
combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in
the listening room of your own home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and
intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in compression artifacts. As a result, it compensates for flattened complexity due to the loss of high-
frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass, providing improved performance for the
overall sound system.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front
channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels.
With an additional channel especially for bass effects, referred to as LFE (Low-Frequency Effect), the system has a total
of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate
moving sound effects and surround sound environments are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic
range from maximum to minimum volumes that are reproduced by the 5 full-range channels, and the precise sound
orientation generated using digital sound processing provides listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your
enjoyment.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for highdefinition programming and BD (Blu-ray disc).
Selected as an optional audio standard for BD, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel
output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of
the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate
Dolby Digital.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new
technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround
left and right channels, instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes
available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-
channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left
and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects
(monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used
with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, as well as in many TV and cable broadcasts. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder
built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-
ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for BD (Blu-ray disc), this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit
identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps,
Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains
fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital,
allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-
compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate.
“24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-
channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video.
Glossary
En 118
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater
system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS Digital Surround in your
home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2
surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES
decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.
DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as BD (Blu-ray disc). It uses optimized low bit rate signals
for network streaming. In the case of a BD, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the
commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media
including BD (Blu-ray disc). Selected as an optional audio standard for BD, this technology delivers sound that is
virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for BD, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-
bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media
including BD (Blu-ray disc). Selected as an optional audio standard for BD, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-
bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for BD, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96
kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/
amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using
DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and
oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to
the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio
CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive
DSD signals via the HDMI jack.
FLAC
This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compression formats in compression
rate but provides higher audio quality.
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals, and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
counted as 0.1, because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5-
channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems.
MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which
achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be
capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music
CD.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used
among others for mobile telephones, portable audio players and other low-capacity devices requiring high sound
quality. In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used to distribute contents on the Internet, and
as such is supported by computers, media servers and many other devices.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using
any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for
sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog
signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling
frequency, while the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of
quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, whereas the
dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the
higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number
of quantized bits, the more accurately the sound level can be reproduced.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on
headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any
surround speakers, by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal
two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with
it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the
ADPCM method.
WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method,
which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be
capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.
En 119
Video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr
signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is
independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is
subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal comprises the three basic elements of a video picture: color,
brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements
combined.
Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the
HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays increase from millions of colors to billions of
colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The
increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Additionally, Deep
Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any sources (such as set-top boxes or AV receivers) and audio/video monitors
(such as digital televisions), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital
audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with
bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/
video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information
on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/.”
“x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the
expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB
standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly
effective for still pictures and computer graphics.
En 120
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to this unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
(solid line) is always available. (dotted line) is
available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion”
(p.94) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default).
■ Video conversion table
• You can select a resolution and an aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing.
• This unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out VIDEO
out
Resolution 480i/
576i
480p/
576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/
576i
480p/
576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/
576i
HDMI in
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
VIDEO in 480i/576i
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
Video device This unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
VIDEO outVIDEO in
En 121
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to this unit with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit (power,
volume, etc.) in conjunction with TV remote control operations. You can also control
playback devices (HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players, etc.) connected to this
unit with an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.21) and “Connecting video
devices (BD/DVD players, etc.)” (p.26).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
- Standby synchronization
- Volume control including mute
- Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
- Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
- Switching between audio output devices (this unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from this unit’s remote control
- Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV in conjunction with a
scene selection (p.39)
- Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
- Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.104)
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
• This setup is required every time when you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1Turn on this unit, TV and playback devices.
2Enable HDMI Control on this unit, TV and playback devices (HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players, etc).
To enable HDMI Control on this unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.95) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and
“Standby Sync”).
3Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off this unit and
playback devices.
4Turn on the main power of the TV and then turn on this unit and
playback devices.
5Switch the TV input to display the video from this unit.
6Check the followings.
On this unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If
not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
7Check that this unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in step 2 and re-plugging the TV in step 3. It
may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices is over the
limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV's power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
This unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
HDMI Control
Press SCENE
(BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays video
from the playback device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
En 122
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
- 480i/60 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the playback device.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents
downloaded via Internet) of BD or HD DVD. This unit does not playback the audio commentaries of the BD
or HD DVD content.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multi-channel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital
Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
En 123
Reference diagram (rear panel)
AC IN
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK/
BI–AMP ZONE 2/PRESENCE
EXTRA SP
R RL L
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
TRIGGER OUT
DOCK NETWORK
FMAM
75Ω
ANTENNA
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
AV 6AV 5AV 4AV 3
(CD)(
TV)
VIDEO
AV 2AV 1
COAXIAL OPTICALCOAXIALOPTICAL
AV
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5
MONITOR OUT
IN
OUT
REMOTE
ZONE 2
OUT
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
R L R L
SINGLE
SIRIUS
+12V
0.1A MAX.
En 124
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other
U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD
Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
iPod™, iPhone™
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to
iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please
note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “iPhone” is a trademark of Apple Inc.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license
agreement.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights
reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.
DLNA Certified is a trademark of the Digital Living Network Alliance in the United States and other countries.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Trademarks
En 125
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Audio x 5 (AV5~6, AUDIO1~2, V-AUX)
[Australia model]
Audio x 6 (AV5~6, AUDIO1~2, PHONO, V-AUX)
• Digital Audio (Support fs: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 2 (AV1, AV4)
Coaxial x 2 (AV2, AV3)
•Video
Composite x 5 (AV3~6, V-AUX)
Component x 2 (AV1~2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI (Front Panel) x 1 (V-AUX)
HDMI (Rear Panel) x 5 (HDMI1~5)
•Other
DOCK x 1 (Audio, Composite Video)
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
Speaker out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*1, EXTRA SP L/R*2)
*1 Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, BI-AMP
(FRONT L/R)]
*2 Note: assignment is possible. [ZONE2, PRESENCE]
Subwoofer out x 1
AV OUT x 1
AUDIO OUT x 1
ZONE2 OUT x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT
- Component x 1
- Composite x 1
AV OUT
- Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 1
Remote jacks
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync,
HDMI Control (CEC), ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
- Dolby Digital
- DTS
- DSD 6ch
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby TrueHD
- DTS-HD
- PCM 2ch-8ch (Max 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
• Satellite Radio Ready [U.S.A. model]
SIRIUS Radio x 1 (SIRIUS)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory, MTP
(Media Transfer Protocol)
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with Windows 7, DLNA ver. 1.5
• Internet Radio
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution,
DTS Express
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
- Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Specifications
En 126
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................90 W+90 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8Ω)
Front L/R .......................................... 125 W/ch (105 W+105 W)
Center...........................................................125 W/ch (105 W)
Surround L/R.................................... 125 W/ch (105 W+105 W)
Surround Back L/R .......................... 125 W/ch (105 W+105 W)
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) .................................. 130/170/200/240 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 100 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)...............................200 mV/47 kΩ
[Australia model]
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ................................3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)...............................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................ 2.3 V
[Australia model]
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD)............................................ 60 mV
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ............................ 2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
REC OUT ...........................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front: Small) .................1 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT.......................................................200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ..............................100 mV/560 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV5 etc. to Front (10 kHz to 100 kHz) ........................ +0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
[Australia model]
PHONO.......................................................................0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
AV5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)
(20 to 20 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω)..................................... 0.06% or less
[Australia model]
PHONO to REC OUT (20 to 20 kHz, 1 V) ............ 0.02% or less
AV5 etc. to Front (Pure Direct)
(20 to 20 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω)..................................... 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
AV5 etc.
(Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV, SP OUT
) .....100 dB or more
[Australia model]
PHONO (Input Shorted 5 mV, REC OUT) ...........81 dB or more
AV5 etc.
(Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV, SP OUT)
.....100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (SP OUT)............................................. 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
AV5 etc.
(Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ..... 60 dB/45 dB or more
[Australia model]
PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)... 60 dB/55 dB or more
AV5 etc.
(Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ..... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back)...... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...........................................NTSC
[Australia model].................................................................PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)..................... NTSC/PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models].............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Australia model]............................. 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono ................................................................................71 dB
Stereo...............................................................................69 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono ................................................................................. 0.3%
Stereo................................................................................ 0.5%
• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]...................530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Australia model]......................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz
En 127
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 400 W/500 VA
[Australia model] ............................................................ 330 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off / Standby Through Off..............0.1 W or less
HDMI Control On/Standby Through On (Typical)............ 2.0 W
Network Standby On (Typical)......................................... 2.0 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)............................435 x 171 x 367 mm
(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 14-1/2”)
• Weight........................................................... 10.7 kg (23.7 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation YD460A0/OMEN1
1
TV
A.R. Systems 0320
Acme 0342
Acura 0323, 0343
ADC 0337
Admiral 0054, 0178, 0336, 0337,
0339, 0346, 0347
Advent 0158
Adventura 0057
Adyson 0277, 0282, 0342
Agashi 0277, 0282
Agazi 0337
Aiko 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343
Aim 0320
Aiwa 0078, 0379
Akai 0050, 0055, 0109, 0159,
0181, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0343, 0349,
0350
Akiba 0320, 0340
Akura 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340
Alaron 0277
Alba 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0351, 0372, 0382
Albatron 0140
Alcyon 0171
Alleron 0059
Allorgan 0282
Allstar 0320, 0350
America Action 0179
AMOi 0276
Amplivision 0161, 0282, 0321, 0342
Amstrad 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340,
0343
Amtron 0058
Anam 0179, 0343
Anam National 0052, 0058
Anglo 0323, 0343
Anitech 0171, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0343
Ansonic 0161, 0168, 0320, 0323,
0341, 0343
AOC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053
Apex 0039, 0111, 0217
Arcam 0277, 0282
Arcam Delta 0342
Aristona 0320, 0349, 0350
Arthur Martin 0321
ASA 0339, 0347
Asberg 0171, 0320, 0350
Astra 0343
Asuka 0277, 0282, 0337, 0340,
0342
Atlantic 0277, 0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
Atori 0323, 0343
Auchan 0321
Audiosonic 0161, 0282, 0320, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
AudioTon 0161, 0282, 0342
Audiovox 0058, 0179, 0194
Ausind 0171
Autovox 0171, 0282, 0337, 0339,
0342
Aventura 0051
Awa 0277, 0282
Axion 0156
Baird 0282
Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339
Basic Line 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0350
Bastide 0282, 0342
Baur 0320, 0349
Bazin 0282
Beko 0161, 0269, 0294, 0302,
0311, 0320, 0328, 0351
Belcor 0008
Bell & Howell 0019, 0054
Benq 0097, 0242, 0361
Beon 0320, 0349, 0350
Best 0161
Bestar 0161, 0320, 0350
Binatone 0282, 0342
Blue Sky 0320, 0340
Blue Star 0348
Boots 0282, 0342
BPL 0320, 0348
Bradford 0058, 0179
Brandt 0322, 0345
Brillian 0182
Brinkmann 0320
Brionvega 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350
Britannia 0277, 0282, 0342
Brockwood 0008
Broksonic 0109, 0179
Bruns 0339
BTC 0340
Bush 0269, 0282, 0283, 0304,
0320, 0323, 0328, 0332,
0340, 0343, 0344, 0346,
0348, 0349, 0350, 0372,
0382, 0463, 0470, 0472
Candle 0008, 0026, 0050, 0057
Capsonic 0337
Carena 0320
Carnivale 0050
Carrefour 0344
Carver 0010
Cascade 0320, 0323, 0343
Casio 0367
Cathay 0320, 0349, 0350
CCE 0183, 0282
Celebrity 0055, 0107
Celera 0039
Centurion 0320, 0349, 0350
Century 0339
CGE 0161, 0171
Changhong 0039
Chimei 0273
Cimline 0323, 0343
Citizen 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050,
0058
City 0323, 0343
Clarion 0179
Clarivox 0349
Clatronic 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0350, 0351
CMS 0277
CMS Hightec 0282
Coby 0197
Colortyme 0008, 0026
Commercial Solutions
0021
Concerto 0008, 0026
Concorde 0323, 0343
Condor 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0350, 0351
Contec 0179, 0277, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344
Contec/Cony 0012, 0058
Continental Edison
0345
Cosmel 0323, 0343
Craig 0058, 0179
Crosley 0010, 0037, 0171, 0339
List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Elenco dei codici di telecomando
Lista de códigos de mando a distancia
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
2
Crown 0058, 0161, 0171, 0179,
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351
CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342
CTC Clatronic 0341
CTX 0205
Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010, 0019,
0021, 0026, 0049, 0050,
0178
CXC 0058, 0179
Cybertron 0340
Cytron 0152
Daewoo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0037,
0053, 0167, 0266, 0275,
0277, 0282, 0315, 0320,
0323, 0331, 0335, 0342,
0343, 0350, 0381, 0465
Dainichi 0277, 0340
Dansai 0277, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0349, 0350
Dantax 0161, 0349
Dawa 0320
Daytron 0007, 0008, 0026, 0323,
0343
De Graaf 0346
Decca 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
Dell 0145, 0245
Denver 0358, 0362
Desmet 0320, 0349, 0350
Diamant 0320
Diamond 0277
DiamondVision 0135, 0143
Dimensia 0049
Disney 0219
Dixi 0282, 0320, 0323, 0343,
0349, 0350
Dream Vision 0461, 0498
DTS 0323, 0343
Dual 0282, 0320, 0342
Dual-Tec 0342, 0343
Dumont 0008, 0030, 0062, 0282,
0339, 0341, 0342
Durabrand 0031, 0051, 0179, 0215
Dux 0349
Dwin 0178
Dynatron 0320, 0349, 0350
Dynex 0228, 0231
Elbe 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320
Elcit 0339
Electa 0348
ELECTRO TECH
0343
Electroband 0055, 0107
Electrograph 0176
Electrohome 0008, 0026, 0052, 0055
Element 0230
Elin 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0349, 0350
Elite 0320, 0340, 0350
Elman 0341
Elta 0277, 0323, 0343
Emerson 0000, 0007, 0008, 0012,
0013, 0019, 0026, 0031,
0037, 0051, 0058, 0059,
0161, 0179, 0320, 0339
Emprex 0154
Envision 0008, 0026, 0050
Epson 0155, 0206, 0359
Erres 0320, 0349, 0350
ESA 0051
ESC 0282
Etron 0343
Eurofeel 0282
Euro-Feel 0337
Euroline 0349
Euroman 0161, 0277, 0282
Euromann 0320, 0337, 0342, 0350
Europhon 0277, 0282, 0320, 0341,
0342, 0350
Expert 0321
Exquisit 0320
Fenner 0323, 0343
Ferguson 0322, 0345, 0349
Fidelity 0277, 0320, 0342, 0346
Filsai 0282
Finlandia 0346
Finlux 0171, 0282, 0320, 0339,
0341, 0342, 0349, 0350
FIRST LINE 0342, 0343, 0350
Firstline 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Fisher 0019, 0161, 0282, 0339,
0342, 0344, 0351
Flint 0320, 0350
Formenti 0171, 0277, 0336, 0339,
0342, 0349
Formenti/Phoenix
0277
Fortress 0336, 0339
Fraba 0161, 0320
Friac 0161
Frontech 0282, 0323, 0337, 0343,
0346, 0347
Fujitsu 0059, 0069, 0074, 0075,
0282
Fujitsu General 0282
Fujitsu Siemens 0504, 0505, 0507, 0510,
0511
Funai 0051, 0058, 0059, 0112,
0113, 0115, 0118, 0119,
0179, 0337
Futuretech 0058, 0179
Galaxi 0320, 0351
Galaxis 0161, 0320
Gateway 0176, 0177, 0241
GBC 0323, 0343, 0344
GE 0008, 0021, 0023, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0034, 0049,
0052, 0056, 0209
Geant Casino 0321
GEC 0282, 0320, 0342, 0347,
0349, 0350
Geloso 0323, 0343, 0346
General Technic 0323, 0343
Genexxa 0320, 0340, 0347, 0350
GFM 0128, 0227
Giant 0282
Gibralter 0008, 0030, 0050, 0062
GoldHand 0277
Goldline 0320
GoldStar 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0031, 0050, 0053, 0161,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0346, 0349,
0350
Goodmans 0246, 0272, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350, 0462, 0473,
0477
Gorenje 0161, 0351
GPM 0340
GPX 0129
Gradiente 0240
Graetz 0347
Granada 0171, 0282, 0320, 0321,
0342, 0344, 0346, 0349,
0350
Grandin 0340, 0343, 0348, 0349
Gronic 0282
Grundig 0160, 0161, 0171, 0310,
0320
Grunpy 0058, 0059, 0179
Haier 0157, 0233
Halifax 0277, 0282, 0337, 0342
Hallmark 0008, 0026, 0031
Hampton 0277, 0282, 0342
Hanseatic 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350
Hantarex 0320, 0323, 0343
Hantor 0320
Harman/Kardon 0010
Harvard 0058, 0179
Harwood 0320, 0323
Havermy 0178
HCM 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0348
Hema 0282, 0323
Hewlett Packard 0192
Higashi 0277
HiLine 0320
Hinari 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0344, 0349, 0350
Hisawa 0321, 0340, 0348
Hisense 0247
Hitachi 0008, 0012, 0026, 0066,
0084, 0092, 0093, 0120,
0172, 0173, 0255, 0270,
0271, 0282, 0320, 0335,
0338, 0342, 0344, 0346,
0347, 0365, 0382, 0448,
0456, 0467, 0482
Hornyphon 0320, 0350
Hoshai 0340
Huanyu 0277, 0342
Hygashi 0277, 0282, 0342
Hyper 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342,
0343
Hypson 0282, 0320, 0321, 0337,
0342, 0348, 0349, 0350
Hyundai 0141
Iberia 0320
ICE 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0343,
0350
ICeS 0277
Ilo 0148, 0153
IMA 0058
Imperial 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347,
0350, 0351
Indiana 0320, 0349, 0350
3
Infinity 0010
InFocus 0250, 0327, 0363, 0479,
0508
Ingelen 0347
Ingersol 0323, 0343
Initial 0153
Inno Hit 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350
Innovation 0337, 0343
Insignia 0131, 0228, 0236, 0238
Inteq 0030
Interactive 0161
Interbuy 0323, 0343
Interfunk 0161, 0320, 0339, 0347,
0349, 0350
International 0277
Intervision 0161, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0341, 0342
Irradio 0171, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0349, 0350
Isukai 0320, 0340
ITC 0282, 0342
ITS 0277, 0320, 0340, 0348,
0350
ITT 0343, 0347
ITV 0320, 0343, 0349
Janeil 0057
JBL 0010
JC Penney 0007, 0008, 0026, 0027,
0049, 0053, 0056
JCB 0055, 0107
Jensen 0008, 0026
JVC 0012, 0014, 0015, 0056,
0064, 0065, 0067, 0169,
0174, 0297, 0314, 0344,
0350, 0375
Kaisui 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0348
Kamosonic 0342
Kamp 0277, 0342
Kapsch 0347
Karcher 0161, 0320, 0342, 0343,
0349
Kawasho 0008, 0026, 0055, 0277
KEC 0179
Kendo 0161, 0320, 0341, 0346
Kenwood 0008, 0026, 0050
KIC 0282
Kingsley 0277, 0342
KLH 0039
Kloss Novabeam
0057, 0058
Kneissel 0161, 0168, 0320
Kolster 0320, 0350
Konka 0340
Korpel 0320, 0349, 0350
Korting 0161, 0339
Kosmos 0320
Koyoda 0343
KTV 0007, 0050, 0058, 0179,
0183, 0282, 0342
Kyoto 0277, 0282
Lasat 0161
Lenco 0323, 0343
Lenoir 0323, 0342, 0343
Leyco 0320, 0337, 0349, 0350
LG 0031, 0053, 0066, 0116,
0117, 0140, 0161, 0164,
0175, 0195, 0269, 0277,
0282, 0300, 0309, 0317,
0320, 0323, 0328, 0342,
0343, 0346, 0349, 0350,
0366, 0368, 0377, 0466,
0471, 0478
LG/GoldStar 0164
Liesenk 0349
Liesenkotter 0320
Life 0337, 0343
Lifetec 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343
Lloyds 0323
Loewe 0161, 0168, 0265, 0320,
0330, 0352
Loewe Opta 0339, 0349, 0350
Logik 0054
Luma 0320, 0323, 0346, 0349
Lumatron 0282, 0320, 0346, 0349,
0350
Lux May 0350
Luxman 0008, 0026
Luxor 0282, 0342, 0346
LXI 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0049, 0111
M Electronic 0342, 0343, 0345, 0347,
0349, 0350
MAG 0096
Magnadyne 0339, 0341, 0349
Magnafon 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
Magnavox 0008, 0009, 0010, 0013,
0026, 0032, 0033, 0048,
0050, 0128, 0211, 0212,
0224, 0226, 0239
Magnum 0337, 0343
Majestic 0054
Mandor 0337
Manesth 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342,
0349, 0350
Marantz 0008, 0010, 0026, 0050,
0204, 0320, 0349, 0350
Marelli 0339
Mark 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0349, 0350
Masuda 0282
Matsui 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0346, 0349,
0350, 0455
Matsushita 0017
Maxent 0147, 0176
Mediator 0320, 0349, 0350
Medion 0320, 0337, 0343
Megapower 0140
Megatron 0026, 0031
MElectronic 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Melvox 0321
Memorex 0019, 0026, 0031, 0053,
0054, 0137, 0215, 0323,
0343
Memphis 0323, 0343
Mercury 0320, 0323
Metz 0339
MGA 0008, 0026, 0031, 0050,
0053
Micromaxx 0337, 0343
Microstar 0337, 0343
Midland 0007, 0021, 0023, 0027,
0030, 0056, 0062
Minerva 0171
Minoka 0320, 0350
Mintek 0153
Mitsubishi 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053,
0066, 0084, 0093, 0098,
0150, 0178, 0289, 0320,
0339, 0344, 0350, 0376
Mivar 0161, 0168, 0171, 0277,
0282, 0342
Monivision 0140
Montgomery Ward
0054
Motion 0171
Motorola 0052, 0178
MTC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053,
0161, 0277
Multi System 0349
Multitech 0058, 0161, 0179, 0183,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0341, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0346, 0349
Murphy 0277, 0342
NAD 0026, 0031, 0111
Naonis 0346
NEC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0052,
0053, 0072, 0103, 0282,
0344
Neckermann 0161, 0282, 0320, 0339,
0342, 0346, 0349, 0350,
0351
NEI 0320, 0349, 0350
Net-TV 0176
Neufunk 0320, 0323
New Tech 0343, 0350
New World 0340
NewTech 0282, 0320, 0323
Nicamagic 0277, 0342
Nikkai 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0349,
0350
Nikko 0026, 0031, 0050
Nobliko 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
Nokia 0347
Norcent 0201
Nordic 0282
Nordmende 0339, 0345, 0347, 0350
Nordvision 0349
Novatronic 0320
Oceanic 0321, 0347
Okano 0161, 0320, 0351
Olevia 0102, 0199, 0200, 0207,
0222
ONCEAS 0342
Onwa 0058, 0179
Opera 0320
Oppo 0130
Optimus 0017, 0019
Optoma 0144
Optonica 0178
Orbit 0320, 0350
4
Orion 0043, 0146, 0283, 0320,
0323, 0328, 0343, 0349,
0350
Orline 0320
Osaki 0282, 0320, 0337, 0340,
0342
Oso 0340
Otto Versand 0282, 0320, 0336, 0342,
0344, 0348, 0349, 0350
Pael 0277, 0342
Palladium 0161, 0282, 0320, 0342,
0351
Palsonic 0282
Panama 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0342, 0343
Panasonic 0016, 0017, 0020, 0022,
0023, 0035, 0052, 0056,
0084, 0085, 0133, 0163,
0193, 0284, 0286, 0290,
0292, 0320, 0325, 0347,
0356, 0483
Panavision 0320
Pathe Cinema 0161, 0168, 0277, 0321,
0342
Pausa 0323, 0343
Penney 0021, 0023, 0031, 0050,
0111
Perdio 0277, 0320
Perfekt 0320
Philco 0008, 0009, 0010, 0012,
0026, 0050, 0052, 0053,
0161, 0171, 0320, 0339
Philharmonic 0282, 0342
Philips 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011,
0012, 0032, 0048, 0049,
0052, 0122, 0128, 0134,
0186, 0187, 0213, 0221,
0224, 0226, 0239, 0256,
0257, 0259, 0261, 0263,
0267, 0280, 0281, 0287,
0296, 0299, 0301, 0303,
0305, 0313, 0319, 0320,
0324, 0333, 0339, 0342,
0349, 0350, 0353, 0357,
0360, 0380, 0383, 0452,
0459, 0460
Philips Magnavox
0011, 0032, 0033
Phoenix 0161, 0277, 0320, 0339,
0349, 0350
Phonola 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349,
0350
Pilot 0007, 0008, 0050
Pioneer 0008, 0026, 0094, 0095,
0161, 0320, 0345, 0347,
0349, 0350, 0458, 0480
Plantron 0320, 0323, 0337, 0350
Playsonic 0282
Polaroid 0039, 0142, 0202, 0234
Poppy 0323, 0343
Portland 0007, 0008, 0026, 0053
Prandoni-Prince
0171, 0346
Precision 0282, 0342
Prima 0157, 0243, 0323, 0343,
0347
Princeton 0140
Prism 0023, 0056
Profex 0323, 0343
Profi-Tronic 0320, 0350
Proline 0320, 0350
Proscan 0021, 0027, 0049
Prosonic 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0349
Protech 0282, 0337, 0341, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Proton 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031
Protron 0196
PROVIEW 0096, 0246
Provision 0320, 0349
Pulsar 0008, 0030, 0062
Pye 0256, 0320, 0349, 0350,
0378
Pymi 0323, 0343
Quandra Vision 0321
Quasar 0017, 0023, 0052, 0056
Quelle 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342,
0349, 0350
Questa 0344
Radialva 0320
RadioShack 0019, 0021, 0031, 0050,
0179, 0320
RadioShack/Realistic
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0049, 0058
Radiola 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Radiomarelli 0320, 0339
Radiotone 0161, 0320, 0323, 0350
Rank 0344
RCA 0008, 0021, 0024, 0025,
0026, 0027, 0042, 0049,
0052, 0053, 0063, 0136,
0225
Realistic 0019, 0031, 0050, 0179
Recor 0320
Redstar 0320
Reflex 0320
Revox 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Rex 0337, 0346, 0347
RFT 0161, 0168, 0339
Rhapsody 0277
R-Line 0320, 0349, 0350
Roadstar 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343
Robotron 0339
Rowa 0277, 0282
Royal Lux 0161
RTF 0339
Runco 0030, 0050, 0062
Saba 0298, 0322, 0339, 0345,
0347
Saisho 0282, 0323, 0337, 0342,
0343
Salora 0346, 0347
Sambers 0171, 0341
Sampo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050,
0176
Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007,
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0036, 0050, 0053, 0076,
0077, 0079, 0114, 0124,
0125, 0126, 0127, 0139,
0161, 0183, 0185, 0190,
0191, 0258, 0264, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323, 0334,
0337, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351, 0373, 0453,
0468
Sandra 0277, 0282, 0342
Sansui 0043, 0109, 0320, 0350
Sanyo 0008, 0019, 0068, 0070,
0071, 0099, 0161, 0168,
0223, 0237, 0277, 0282,
0288, 0295, 0323, 0342,
0344, 0369, 0469
SBR 0320, 0349
Sceptre 0235, 0244
Schaub Lorenz 0347
Schneider 0282, 0316, 0318, 0320,
0333, 0340, 0342, 0349,
0350, 0382
Scotch 0026, 0031
Scott 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0058, 0059, 0149, 0179
Sears 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021,
0026, 0027, 0031, 0049,
0051, 0059, 0111
SEG 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0341, 0342, 0344,
0349, 0382
SEI 0320
SEI-Sinudyne 0339, 0341, 0347
Seleco 0344, 0346, 0347
Sencora 0323, 0343
Sentra 0323
Serino 0277
Sharp 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003,
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0060, 0088, 0089, 0091,
0138, 0165, 0170, 0178,
0198, 0229, 0262, 0278,
0279, 0291, 0308, 0312,
0336, 0344, 0354, 0370,
0449, 0450, 0451, 0464,
0474, 0476, 0481
Sheng Chia 0178
Shogun 0008
Siarem 0320, 0339, 0341
Sierra 0320, 0350
Siesta 0161
Signature 0054
Silva 0277
Silver 0344
Singer 0321, 0339, 0341
Sinudyne 0320, 0339, 0341, 0349
Skantic 0347
Solavox 0347
Sonitron 0161, 0282
Sonoko 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
Sonolor 0321, 0347
Sontec 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Sony 0038, 0044, 0045, 0047,
0055, 0090, 0104, 0105,
0107, 0110, 0123, 0184,
0220, 0248, 0249, 0251,
5
0252, 0254, 0326, 0343,
0344, 0371, 0374, 0457,
0475, 0486
Sound & Vision 0340, 0341
Soundesign 0008, 0026, 0031, 0058,
0059, 0179
Soundwave 0320, 0349, 0350
Squareview 0051
SSS 0008, 0058, 0179
Standard 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0350
Starlite 0058, 0179, 0320, 0323,
0349
Stenway 0348
Stern 0346, 0347
Strato 0320, 0323
Stylandia 0282
Sunkai 0343
Sunstar 0320, 0323
Sunwood 0320, 0323, 0343, 0350
Superla 0277, 0282, 0342
Superscan 0013, 0178
SuperTech 0277, 0320, 0323
Supra 0323, 0343
Supre-Macy 0057
Supreme 0055, 0107
Susumu 0340
Sutron 0323, 0343
SVA 0151
Sydney 0277, 0282, 0342
Sylvania 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011,
0013, 0026, 0048, 0050,
0051, 0128, 0227, 0253
Symphonic 0051, 0058, 0062, 0128,
0179, 0215
Syntax 0199
Syntax-Brillian 0199
Sysline 0349
Sytong 0277
Tandy 0178, 0282, 0336, 0340,
0342, 0347
Tashiko 0277, 0282, 0342, 0344,
0346
Tatung 0052, 0177, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0349, 0350
TCM 0337, 0343
Teac 0282, 0320
Tec 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343
Technics 0017, 0023, 0056
TechniSat 0274, 0496, 0497, 0499
Techwood 0008, 0023, 0026, 0056
TEDELEX 0282
Teknika 0007, 0008, 0010, 0012,
0026, 0053, 0054, 0058,
0059, 0179
Teleavia 0345
Telecor 0282, 0320
Telefunken 0320, 0322, 0345, 0350
Telegazi 0320
Telemeister 0320
Telesonic 0320
Telestar 0320
Teletech 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Teleton 0282, 0342
Televideon 0277
Televiso 0321
Tensai 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0350
Tesmet 0350
Tevion 0337, 0343
Texet 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342
Thomson 0162, 0188, 0189, 0285,
0320, 0322, 0342, 0345,
0350
Thorn 0320, 0349
TMK 0008, 0026, 0031
TNCi 0030
Tokai 0282, 0320, 0350
Tokyo 0277, 0342
Tomashi 0348
Toshiba 0018, 0019, 0040, 0041,
0046, 0073, 0100, 0103,
0108, 0109, 0111, 0121,
0132, 0166, 0208, 0210,
0214, 0217, 0260, 0268,
0282, 0283, 0293, 0304,
0306, 0307, 0329, 0344,
0355, 0454
Totevision 0007
Towada 0282, 0347
Trakton 0282
Trans Continens 0282, 0320
Transtec 0277
Trident 0282
Triumph 0320
Uher 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347,
0350
Ultravox 0277, 0320, 0339, 0341,
0342
Unic Line 0320
United 0349
Universum 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320,
0337, 0349, 0350, 0351
Univox 0320
Vector Research 0050
Vestel 0282, 0320, 0346, 0347,
0349, 0350, 0351
Vexa 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Victor 0015, 0344, 0350
VIDEOLOGIC 0277
Videologique 0277, 0282, 0340, 0342
VideoSystem 0320, 0350
Videotechnic 0277, 0282
Vidikron 0010
Vidtech 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053
Viewsonic 0176, 0203, 0232, 0364
Viking 0057
Viore 0148
Visiola 0277, 0342
Vision 0282, 0320, 0350
Vizio 0008, 0177, 0218, 0242,
0500, 0501, 0502, 0503,
0506
Vortec 0320, 0349, 0350
Voxson 0171, 0320, 0339, 0346,
0347, 0350
Waltham 0282, 0320, 0342
Wards 0008, 0009, 0010, 0026,
0031, 0048, 0049, 0050,
0053, 0054, 0059
Watson 0320, 0349, 0350
Watt Radio 0277, 0341, 0342
Waycon 0111
Wega 0320, 0339, 0344
Wegavox 0323
Weltblick 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220
White Westinghouse
0037, 0090, 0277, 0320,
0341, 0342, 0349
Wincom 0101, 0106
Xrypton 0320
Yamaha 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053,
0080, 0081, 0082, 0083,
0086, 0087
Yamishi 0282, 0320
Yokan 0320
Yoko 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Yorx 0340
Zanussi 0282, 0346
Zenith 0008, 0028, 0029, 0030,
0031, 0054, 0061, 0062
VCR
ABS 1016
Adventura 1069
Adyson 1008
Aiwa 1024, 1026, 1027, 1069
Akai 1021, 1027
Akiba 1008, 1029
Akura 1008, 1027, 1029
Alba 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1030
Alienware 1016
Ambassador 1030
American High 1068
Amstrad 1008, 1009, 1026
Anitech 1008, 1029
Apex 1088
ASA 1028, 1031
Asha 1070
Asuka 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029,
1031
Audio Dynamics 1064
Audiosonic 1009
Audiovox 1071
Baird 1009, 1025, 1026, 1027
Bang & Olufsen 1017
Basic Line 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1030
Baur 1028
Beaumark 1070
Bell & Howell 1065
Bestar 1009, 1025, 1030
Black Panther Line
1009, 1025
Blaupunkt 1028
Bondstec 1008, 1030
Broksonic 1100
Bush 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1049, 1051, 1063,
1217
Calix 1071
Candle 1070, 1071
Canon 1068
Cathay 1009
6
Catron 1030
CGE 1026, 1027
Cimline 1008, 1024, 1029
CineVision 1104
Citizen 1070, 1071
Clatronic 1008, 1030
Colortyme 1064
Condor 1009, 1025, 1030
Craig 1070, 1071
Crown 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029,
1030
Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070
Cybernex 1070
CyberPower 1016
Daewoo 1009, 1025, 1030, 1038,
1069, 1223
Dansai 1008, 1009, 1029
Dantax 1024
Daytron 1009, 1025
DBX 1064
De Graaf 1028
Decca 1026, 1027, 1028
Dell 1016
Denko 1008
DiamondVision 1096
DigiFusion 1014
DIRECTV 1019, 1105, 1110, 1111,
1113, 1116, 1122
Dish Network 1018
Dishpro 1018
Dual 1009, 1027, 1028
Dumont 1026, 1028
Durabrand 1114
Dynatech 1069
Echostar 1018
Elbe 1009
Elcatech 1008
Electrohome 1071
Electrophonic 1071
Elsay 1008
Elta 1008, 1009, 1029
Emerson 1008, 1020, 1068, 1069,
1071
ESC 1009, 1025
Etzuko 1008, 1029
Expressvu 1018
Ferguson 1027
Fidelity 1008, 1026
Finlandia 1028
Finlux 1026, 1027, 1028
Firstline 1008, 1024, 1029, 1031
Fisher 1065
Flint 1024
Formenti/Phoenix
1028
Frontech 1030
Fuji 1068
Fujitsu 1026
Funai 1026, 1069
Galaxy 1026
Garrard 1069
Gateway 1016
GBC 1029, 1030
GE 1068, 1070
GEC 1028
Geloso 1029
General 1030
General Technic 1024
GOI 1018
GoldHand 1008, 1029
Goldstar 1026, 1031, 1064, 1071
Goodmans 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026,
1029, 1030, 1031
Gradiente 1069
Graetz 1027
Granada 1028
Grandin 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026,
1029, 1030, 1031
Grundig 1028, 1029
Hanseatic 1009, 1028, 1031
Harley Davidson 1069
Harman/Kardon 1064
Harwood 1008
HCM 1008, 1029
Headquarter 1065
Hewlett Packard 1016
Hinari 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
Hisawa 1024
Hitachi 1011, 1026, 1027, 1028,
1046, 1062
HNS 1110
Howard Computers
1016
HP 1016
HTS 1018
Hughes 1111, 1113, 1122
Hughes Network Systems
1110, 1116
Humax 1012, 1110, 1113
Hush 1016
Hypson 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
iBUYPOWER 1016
Impego 1030
Imperial 1026
Inno Hit 1008, 1009, 1025, 1028,
1029, 1030
Innovation 1024
Instant Replay 1068
Interbuy 1008, 1031
Interfunk 1028
Intervision 1009, 1026
Irradio 1008, 1029, 1031
ITT 1027
ITV 1009, 1025, 1031
JC Penney 1064, 1065, 1068, 1070,
1071
JCL 1068
JVC 1007, 1018, 1027, 1039,
1064, 1065, 1066, 1067,
1078, 1089, 1092, 1093,
1094, 1095, 1113, 1208,
1209, 1212, 1213, 1215,
1218
Kaisui 1008, 1029
Karcher 1028
Kendo 1008, 1024, 1025, 1030
Kenwood 1027, 1064, 1065
Kodak 1068, 1071
Korpel 1008, 1029
Kyoto 1008
Lenco 1025
Leyco 1008, 1029
LG 1010, 1026, 1031, 1047,
1054, 1056, 1071, 1103,
1221
Lifetec 1024
Linksys 1016
Lloyd's 1069
Loewe Opta 1028, 1031
Logik 1008, 1029
Lumatron 1009, 1025
Luxor 1008
LXI 1071
M Electronic 1026
Magnavox 1020, 1068, 1114, 1126
Magnin 1071
Manesth 1008, 1029
Marantz 1028, 1064, 1065, 1068
Mark 1009
Marta 1071
Matsui 1024, 1031
Matsushita 1068
Media Center PC
1016
Mediator 1028
Medion 1024
MEI 1068
Memorex 1023, 1026, 1031, 1065,
1068, 1069, 1070, 1071,
1098, 1114
Memphis 1008, 1029
MGN Technology
1070
Micromaxx 1024
Microsoft 1016
Microstar 1024
Migros 1026
Mind 1016
Mitsubishi 1026, 1028, 1079
Motorola 1068
MTC 1070
Multitech 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029,
1030, 1069, 1070
Murphy 1026
NEC 1027, 1064, 1065
Neckermann 1027, 1028
NEI 1028
Nesco 1008, 1029
Nikkai 1008, 1009, 1030
Nikko 1071
Niveus Media 1016
Noblex 1070
Nokia 1009, 1027
Nordmende 1027
Northgate 1016
Oceanic 1026, 1027
Okano 1008, 1009, 1024
Olympus 1068
Optimus 1071
Orion 1023, 1024, 1051, 1115,
1217
Orson 1026
Osaki 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
Otto Versand 1028
Palladium 1008, 1027, 1029, 1031
Panasonic 1000, 1022, 1044, 1055,
1068, 1072, 1085, 1090,
1091, 1120, 1121, 1214
Pathe Marconi 1027
Perdio 1026
Philco 1008, 1068
7
Philips 1006, 1013, 1028, 1035,
1040, 1045, 1046, 1050,
1058, 1059, 1061, 1068,
1076, 1101, 1110, 1113,
1116, 1117, 1122, 1126,
1210, 1211
Philips Magnavox
1076
Phonola 1028
Pilot 1071
Pioneer 1028, 1036
Polaroid 1088, 1099
Portland 1009, 1025, 1030
Prinz 1026
Profex 1029
Proline 1026
Proscan 1019
Prosonic 1009, 1024
Pulsar 1114
Pye 1028, 1102
Quarter 1065
Quartz 1065
Quasar 1068
Quelle 1026, 1028
Radialva 1008
RadioShack 1071
RadioShack/Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
Radiola 1028
Radix 1071
Randex 1071
RCA 1019, 1068, 1070, 1075,
1110, 1113, 1122, 1125
Realistic 1065, 1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
ReplayTV 1022, 1123
Rex 1027
RFT 1008, 1028, 1030
Ricavision 1016
Roadstar 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029,
1031
Royal 1008
Runco 1114
Saba 1027
Saisho 1024, 1029
Samsung 1002, 1034, 1041, 1043,
1057, 1060, 1070, 1084,
1110, 1116, 1122, 1124,
1220, 1222
Samurai 1008, 1030
Sanky 1114
Sansui 1023, 1027, 1106, 1115
Sanyo 1032, 1065, 1070
Saville 1009
SBR 1028
Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027
Schneider 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1026, 1028, 1029, 1030,
1031
Sears 1065, 1068, 1071
SEG 1008, 1009, 1029
SEI-Sinudyne 1028
Seleco 1027
Sentra 1008, 1030
Sentron 1008, 1029
Sharp 1003, 1033, 1077, 1107,
1127, 1219
Shintom 1008, 1029
Shivaki 1031
Shogun 1070
Siemens 1031
Silva 1031
Silver 1009
Singer 1068
Sinudyne 1028
Solavox 1030
Sonic Blue 1022, 1123
Sonneclair 1008
Sonoko 1009, 1025
Sontec 1031
Sony 1001, 1016, 1048, 1053,
1073, 1074, 1080, 1081,
1082, 1083, 1108, 1118,
1216
Stack 1016
Stack 9 1016
Standard 1009, 1025
Stern 1009
STS 1068
Sunkai 1024
Sunstar 1026
Suntronic 1026
Sunwood 1008, 1029
Superscan 1020
Sylvania 1020, 1068, 1069, 1102,
1126
Symphonic 1008, 1069, 1126
Systemax 1016
Tagar Systems 1016
Taisho 1024
Tandberg 1009
Tandy 1065
Tashiko 1026, 1071
Tatung 1026, 1027, 1028
TCM 1015, 1024, 1042
Teac 1009, 1069
Tec 1008, 1009, 1030
Technics 1068
Teknika 1068, 1069, 1071
Teleavia 1027
Telefunken 1027
Teletech 1008, 1009
Tenosal 1008, 1029
Tensai 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
Tevion 1024
Thomson 1005, 1027
Thorn 1027
Tivo 1108, 1110, 1111, 1113,
1117, 1118, 1119, 1122
TMK 1070
Tokai 1008, 1029, 1031
Tonsai 1029
Toshiba 1004, 1016, 1027, 1028,
1037, 1049, 1052, 1086,
1087, 1097, 1109, 1112,
1194
Totevision 1070, 1071
Touch 1016
Towada 1008, 1029
Towika 1008, 1029
TVA 1030
Uher 1031
UltimateTV 1019
Ultravox 1009
Unitech 1070
United Quick Star
1009, 1025
Universum 1026, 1028, 1031
Vector Research 1064
Video Concepts 1064
Videon 1024
Videosonic 1070
Viewsonic 1016
Voodoo 1016
Wards 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071
Weltblick 1031
XR-1000 1068, 1069
Yamaha 1064, 1065
Yamishi 1008, 1029
Yokan 1008, 1029
Yoko 1008, 1029, 1030, 1031
Zenith 1114
ZT Group 1016
DVD
4Kus 2051
Accurian 2142
Advent 2155, 2251
AEG 2362
Airis 2364
Aiwa 2322
Akai 2145, 2177, 2179, 2248
Akura 2356
Alba 2064, 2165, 2186, 2337,
2346
Alco 2149
Alize 2361
Allegro 2133
Amitech 2362
Amphion MediaWorks
2195
AMW 2195, 2363
Apex 2030, 2124, 2125, 2126,
2127, 2130, 2131
Apple 2241
Arrgo 2138
Asono 2364
Aspire 2152, 2222
Astar 2240
ATACOM 2364
Audiovox 2061, 2149
Avious 2367
Awa 2 3 6 3
Axion 2249
Bang & Olufsen 2128
Baze 2367
BBK 2364
Bellagio 2363
Best Buy 2359
Blaupunkt 2131
Blue Parade 2157
Boghe 2382
Brainwave 2362
Brandt 2148, 2188
Broksonic 2145, 2146
Bush 2064, 2110, 2170, 2268,
2290, 2346, 2358, 2367,
2383
8
California Audio Labs
2151
Cambridge Audio
2354
CAT 2352, 2353
CAVS 2192
Centrum 2353
CGV 2354, 2362
Changhong 2140
Cinetec 2363
CineVision 2133, 2237
Clatronic 2358, 2367
Coby 2031, 2046, 2360
Conia 2383
Continental Edison
2363
Crown 2362
C-Tech 2355
Curtis Mathes 2139
CVG 2377
CyberHome 2022, 2098, 2138, 2187,
2336
Cytron 2244
Daenyx 2363
Daewoo 2001, 2133, 2276, 2298,
2330, 2362, 2363, 2377
Daewoo International
2363
Dalton 2357
Dansai 2362, 2381
Daytek 2184, 2195, 2363
Dayton 2363
DEC 2358
Decca 2362
Denon 2059, 2151, 2193, 2332
Denver 2356, 2358, 2360, 2370
Denzel 2380
Desay 2205
Diamond 2354, 2355
DiamondVision 2225, 2232
Disney 2010, 2028
DK Digital 2339
Dmtech 2176
Dual 2380
Durabrand 2136
DVX 2355
Easy Home 2359
Eclipse 2354
E-Dem 2364
Electrohome 2362
Elin 2362
Elta 2341, 2361, 2362
Emerson 2129, 2137, 2150
Enterprise 2129
Enzer 2380
Epson 2247
ESA 2137
Finlux 2354, 2362, 2367
Fintec 2377
Fisher 2134
Funai 2137
Gateway 2051
GE 2029, 2131, 2156
Gericom 2351
GFM 2226
Giec 2382
Global Solutions 2355
Global Sphere 2355
Go Video 2133, 2213
Goodmans 2165, 2280, 2291, 2358,
2371, 2376, 2382
GPX 2227
Gradiente 2151
Graetz 2380
Greenhill 2131
Grundig 2349
Grunkel 2362, 2366
GVG 2377
H&B 2358
H_her 2364
Haaz 2354, 2355
Haier 2254
Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135
HiMAX 2359
Hitachi 2062, 2090, 2115, 2274,
2282, 2316, 2359, 2380
Hiteker 2130
Home Tech Industries
2364
Hyundai 2366
Ilo 2245
Initial 2131, 2245
Innovation 2182
Insignia 2002, 2137, 2253
Integra 2157
Irradio 2053
iSymphony 2246
JBL 2135
JVC 2020, 2096, 2097, 2099,
2100, 2101, 2102, 2103,
2106, 2107, 2160, 2257,
2260, 2262, 2263, 2321,
2324, 2326, 2327, 2343,
2464, 2465, 2468, 2469,
2471
Jwin 2198
Kansai 2360
Kawasaki 2149
Kennex 2362
Kenwood 2041, 2151, 2348
KeyPlug 2362
Kiiro 2362
Kingavon 2358
Kiss 2380
KLH 2131, 2149
Koda 2358
Koss 2013, 2148, 2158
KXD 2359
Landel 2143
Lasonic 2132
Lawson 2355
Lecson 2381
Lenco 2358, 2362, 2367
Lenoxx 2136, 2153
LG 2002, 2033, 2038, 2057,
2129, 2133, 2189, 2191,
2223, 2238, 2270, 2288,
2335, 2373, 2375
Life 2182
Lifetec 2182
Limit 2355
Liquid Video 2158
Liteon 2043, 2051, 2142
Loewe 2320
LogicLab 2355
Magnavox 2025, 2050, 2137, 2150,
2159, 2224, 2230, 2358
Magnex 2367
Majestic 2360
Marantz 2328
Marquant 2362
Matsui 2148, 2378
McIntosh 2199
Mecotek 2362
Medion 2182
Memorex 2028, 2145, 2234
MiCO 2354, 2382
Micromaxx 2182
Microsoft 2156
Microstar 2182
Minoka 2362
Minowa 2367
Mintek 2131, 2245
Mitsubishi 2003
Mizuda 2358, 2359
Monyka 2380
Mustek 2186
Mx Onda 2354
Mystral 2366
Naiko 2362
Nesa 2131
Neufunk 2380
Nevir 2362
Next Base 2143
Nexxtech 2243
NU-TEC 2383
Onkyo 2159, 2368
Oopla 2051
Oppo 2196, 2255
Optim 2381
Optimus 2180
Orava 2358
Orbit 2363
Orion 2073, 2110
Oritron 2148, 2158
P&B 2358
Pacific 2355
Panasonic 2011, 2024, 2034, 2042,
2058, 2062, 2066, 2067,
2093, 2116, 2117, 2118,
2119, 2120, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2151, 2159, 2164,
2166, 2167, 2172, 2173,
2175, 2209, 2214, 2275,
2277, 2278, 2281, 2282,
2283, 2301, 2374, 2470
Parasound 2197
peeKTON 2364
Philips 2008, 2012, 2025, 2044,
2050, 2051, 2053, 2060,
2072, 2108, 2111, 2147,
2159, 2163, 2169, 2174,
2181, 2185, 2230, 2261,
2266, 2267, 2286, 2287,
2289, 2295, 2300, 2302,
2317, 2328, 2338, 2342,
2350, 2467
Phonotrend 2367
Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2035, 2092, 2094, 2095,
2109, 2157, 2180, 2190,
9
2212, 2269, 2272, 2299,
2304, 2305, 2306, 2307,
2308, 2309, 2310, 2311,
2344, 2345, 2347, 2379
Pointer 2362
Polaroid 2125, 2215, 2235
Portland 2362
Powerpoint 2363
Prima 2252
Proceed 2130
Proscan 2156
Prosonic 2360, 2377
Protron 2202
Provision 2358
Pye 2144
Qwestar 2148
Raite 2380
RCA 2021, 2029, 2104, 2105,
2131, 2149, 2156, 2157,
2229
RedStar 2356, 2360, 2362
Regent 2153
Reoc 2355
Rimax 2361
Rio 2133
Roadstar 2331, 2358
Ronin 2363
Rotel 2203
Rowa 2154, 2383
Rownsonic 2353
Saba 2148, 2188
Sabaki 2355
Saivod 2362
Sampo 2141
Samsung 2000, 2045, 2077, 2112,
2113, 2114, 2115, 2151,
2200, 2216, 2219, 2228,
2264, 2265, 2271, 2279,
2294, 2303, 2329, 2365
Sansui 2073, 2145, 2354, 2355,
2362
Sanyo 2134, 2145, 2217, 2292
ScanMagic 2186
Schaub Lorenz 2362
Schneider 2176
Scientific Labs 2355
Scott 2161, 2357
Seeltech 2364
SEG 2162, 2355, 2363, 2380
Sharp 2006, 2040, 2088, 2091,
2182, 2194, 2220, 2221,
2231, 2236, 2293, 2340
Shinsonic 2245
Sigmatek 2359, 2364
Silva 2356
Singer 2354, 2355
Skymaster 2325, 2355
Skyworth 2356
Slim Art 2362
SM Electronic 2355
Sonic Blue 2133
Sontech 2366
Sony 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009,
2014, 2015, 2023, 2026,
2027, 2052, 2068, 2069,
2070, 2071, 2074, 2075,
2084, 2085, 2087, 2168,
2171, 2208, 2210, 2211,
2258, 2273, 2284, 2285,
2312, 2313, 2314, 2315,
2318, 2319, 2466
Soundmaster 2355
Soundmax 2355
Spectra 2363
Spectroniq 2201
Standard 2355
Star Cluster 2355
Starmedia 2358, 2364
Sungale 2204
Sunkai 2362
Superscan 2150
Supervision 2355
Sylvania 2012, 2137, 2150, 2178,
2230, 2239
Symphonic 2108, 2230
Synn 2355
T.D.E. Systems 2366
Tatung 2001, 2362
TCM 2182, 2297
Teac 2149, 2333, 2355, 2383
Tec 2356
Technics 2151
Technika 2362, 2367
Telefunken 2353
Tensai 2362
Tevion 2182, 2355, 2357
Theta Digital 2157
Thomson 2183, 2188, 2334, 2372
Tokai 2356, 2380
Top Suxess 2364
Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039,
2048, 2049, 2054, 2055,
2072, 2073, 2076, 2078,
2079, 2086, 2145, 2159,
2218, 2233, 2256, 2259,
2296, 2369
TRANScontinents
2363, 2367
Transonic 2367
Trio 2362
Trutech 2242
TruVision 2359
TSM 2364
Umax 2361
United 2367
Urban Concepts 2159
US Logic 2245
Venturer 2149
Viewmaster 2364
Vocopro 2206
VocoStar 2207
Waitec 2364
Welltech 2382
Westinghouse 2063, 2250
Wharfedale 2354, 2355
Woxter 2361, 2364
Xbox 2156, 2183
Xlogic 2355, 2362
XMS 2362
Xoro 2382
Yamada 2051, 2361, 2363
Yamaha 2056, 2064, 2065, 2080,
2081, 2082, 2083, 2089,
2118, 2151, 2323
Yamakawa 2363, 2380
Yukai 2186
Zenith 2002, 2129, 2133, 2159,
2223
Blu-ray Disc
JVC 2475
LG 2033
Panasonic 2011, 2209, 2214
Pioneer 2212
Samsung 2045, 2113
Sharp 2194, 2220, 2221
Sony 2075
Yamaha 2064, 2474
DVR
Bush 2110
Hitachi 2090
Panasonic 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116,
2117, 2119, 2120, 2122,
2123
Philips 2108, 2111
Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2092, 2094, 2095, 2109
RCA 2105
Samsung 2113, 2219
Sharp 2088, 2091
Sony 2084, 2085, 2087
Toshiba 2086, 2218
Victor 2475
Yamaha 2089, 2118
DVD Recorder
Aspire 2222
Astar 2240
Broksonic 2146
Go Video 2213
Hitachi 2062
Insignia 2002
Irradio 2053
JVC 2100, 2101, 2106, 2107
LG 2033, 2057, 2223, 2238
Liteon 2043
Panasonic 2011, 2034, 2058, 2062,
2116, 2117, 2119, 2120,
2121, 2123
Philips 2008, 2044, 2050, 2051,
2147
Pioneer 2017, 2035
Pye 2144
Samsung 2000, 2112, 2216
Sansui 2073
Sanyo 2217
Sony 2004, 2005, 2007, 2052,
2068, 2069, 2074, 2208,
2210, 2211
Sylvania 2239
Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039,
2049, 2054, 2055, 2076
Yamaha 2056
10
Cable
ABC 3002, 3003, 3017, 3066,
3067, 3086, 3093, 3119,
3122
ADB 3020
Adelphia 3081
Alcatel 3016
Americast 3124
Amstrad 3022, 3098
Antronix 3065, 3070
Archer 3070
Arcon 3098
AT&T 3095
Axis 3098
Bell South 3124
Cable Vision 3092
Cabletenna 3065
Cabletime 3104
Cableview 3087
Clearmaster 3127
ClearMax 3127
Clyde Cablevision
3105
Colour Voice 3068
Comcast 3084, 3088, 3117
Comcrypt 3107
Comtronics 3069
Contec 3074
Coolmax 3127
COX 3084
Cryptovision 3110
Director 3084
Eastern 3075
Everquest 3123
Fidelity 3098
Filmnet 3107
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3111
Filmnet Comcrypt
3111
Finlux 3097
Focus 3126
Foxtel 3022
France Telecom 3100, 3101
Freebox 3023
GC Electronics 3070
GE 3066, 3093
GEC 3105
Gemini 3072, 3123
General Instrument
3017, 3025, 3066, 3084,
3090, 3096, 3117
Goldstar 3120
Gooding 3099
Grundig 3098, 3099
Hamlin 3073, 3078
Hirschmann 3097
Hitachi 3066
HomeChoice 3106
Humax 3021, 3080, 3083
ITT Nokia 3097
Jasco 3123
Jerrold 3017, 3018, 3025, 3066,
3072, 3084, 3090, 3096,
3119, 3123
JVC 3099
Kabel Deutschland
3024, 3027, 3121
Macab 3101
Magnavox 3079
Maspro 3099
Matsui 3099
MegaCable 3117
Memorex 3076, 3122
Minerva 3099
Mnet 3107
Motorola 3025, 3026, 3084, 3088,
3090, 3095, 3117
Movie Time 3077, 3109
Mr Zapp 3101
Multichoice 3107
Multitech 3127
NEC 3064
NET Brazil 3085
Nokia 3097
Noos 3101
NSC 3077
Oak 3074
Pace 3006, 3089, 3121
Palladium 3099
Panasonic 3112, 3118, 3122
Paragon 3122
Philips 3068, 3071, 3079, 3099,
3100, 3101, 3103
Pioneer 3001, 3006, 3094, 3098,
3114, 3116, 3120
Popular Mechanics
3126
Proscan 3066, 3093
Pulsar 3122
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3018
Quasar 3122
RadioShack 3123, 3127
RCA 3030, 3031, 3087, 3118
Realistic 3070
Recoton 3126
Regal 3078
Regency 3075
Rembrandt 3066
Runco 3122
Sagem 3101
Samsung 3069, 3089, 3114, 3120
SAT 3098
Scientific Atlanta
3000, 3001, 3002, 3003,
3006, 3028, 3029, 3081,
3086, 3089, 3094, 3095,
3108
Signal 3072, 3123
Signature 3066
Sony 3092, 3125
Sprucer 3118
Standard Component
3115
Starcom 3017, 3072, 3119, 3123
Stargate 3072, 3123
Starquest 3072, 3123
Supercable 3090
Supermax 3127
Tele+1 3107, 3111
Telepiu 3107
Thomson 3082, 3091
TIME WARNER
3084
Tocom 3067
Torx 3017
Toshiba 3122
Tristar 3127
Tudi 3102
Tusa 3072, 3123
TV86 3077
Unika 3065, 3070
United Cable 3018, 3119
Universal 3065, 3070
Universum 3097, 3099
V2 3127
Videoway 3019
View Star 3074, 3077, 3079
Viewmaster 3127
Vision 3127
Visiopass 3097, 3100, 3101
Vortex View 3127
Wittenberg 3098
Zenith 3113, 3122, 3124
Zentek 3126
Satellite
AB Sat 4216, 4217
AccessHD 4104
ADB 4220
AGS 4216
Akai 4053, 4055
Alba 4001, 4004, 4006, 4007,
4062, 4217
Aldes 4005, 4007, 4010
Allsat 4048, 4053, 4055
Allsonic 4005, 4008, 4024
Alltech 4217
Alpha 4053
Alpha Digital 4104
Alphastar 4077
Amitronica 4217
Amstrad 4011, 4035, 4217, 4218
Anglo 4217
Ankaro 4005, 4008, 4024, 4217
Anttron 4001, 4004
Apollo 4001
Armstrong 4011, 4053
Artec 4100
Asat 4053, 4055
ASLF 4217
Astacom 4216
Astra 4009, 4011, 4054, 4217,
4219
Astro 4004, 4008, 4010, 4015,
4024, 4213, 4218, 4219
AudioTon 4004, 4048
Aurora 4222
Austar 4222
Axiel 4216
Axis 4008, 4009, 4024, 4050
Best 4008, 4024
Blaupunkt 4015
Blue Sky 4217
Boca 4011, 4054, 4059, 4217
Boston 4216
Brain Wave 4013
Broadcast 4012
11
Broco 4217
BSkyB 4035, 4041
BT 4216
Bubu Sat 4217
Bush 4006, 4045
Cambridge 4218
Canal Satellite 4213
Canal+ 4213
CaptiveWorks 4099
Channel Master 4007, 4110
Chaparral 4075
CHEROKEE 4216
Chess 4212, 4217
CityCom 4006, 4215, 4219
Clatronic 4013
CNT 4010
Comag 4080, 4081, 4082, 4083,
4086
Commlink 4005
Comtech 4050
Condor 4008, 4024, 4219
Connexions 4014, 4024
Conrad 4024, 4215, 4218, 4219
Conrad Electronic
4217, 4219
Contec 4050
Coolsat 4096
Cosat 4048
Coship 4109
Crown 4011
Daeryung 4014
Daewoo 4057, 4217
DDC 4007
Delega 4007
Dew 4050
Diamond 4051
Digiality 4219
Digital Stream 4105
DIRECTV 4056, 4064, 4067, 4068,
4070, 4071, 4074, 4107,
4116, 4119, 4121, 4122,
4123, 4127, 4192, 4193,
4194, 4195, 4196, 4197,
4198, 4199, 4200, 4201,
4202, 4203, 4206, 4207,
4221
Discoverer 4212
Discovery 4216
Diseqc 4216
Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089, 4092,
4094, 4095, 4117
Dishpro 4018, 4117
Distrisat 4053
Ditristrad 4048
DNT 4014, 4053, 4055
Drake 4072
DStv 4222
Dune 4024
Echostar 4014, 4018, 4065, 4089,
4117, 4217
Einhell 4001, 4005, 4011, 4217,
4218
Elap 4216, 4217
Elekta 4010
Elsat 4217
Elta 4001, 4008, 4024, 4048,
4053, 4055
Emanon 4001
Emme Esse 4008, 4024
Engel 4217
Ep Sat 4006
EURIEULT 4031
Eurodec 4052
Europa 4053, 4218, 4219
Europhon 4219
Eurosat 4011
Eurosky 4008, 4011, 4215, 4218,
4219, 4024
Eurostar 4011, 4215, 4219
Eutelsat 4217
Exator 4001, 4004
Expressvu 4117
Fenner 4024, 4212, 4217
Ferguson 4006, 4052, 4214
Fidelity 4218
Finlandia 4006
Finlux 4006
FinnSat 4050, 4052
Flair Mate 4217
Foxtel 4222
Freecom 4001, 4049, 4218
FTEmaximal 4024, 4217
Fuba 4001, 4008, 4014, 4015,
4024, 4055, 4215
Galaxis 4005, 4008, 4009, 4024,
4048, 4050, 4215, 4222
GE 4066, 4093, 4111, 4197
General Instrument
4019, 4073
GMI 4011
GOI 4117
Goldbox 4213
GoldStar 4049
Goodmans 4002, 4006, 4029
Goodmind 4111
Grandin 4031
Grothusen 4001, 4049
Grundig 4004, 4006, 4015, 4035,
4211, 4218, 4222
Hänsel & Gretel 4219
Hantor 4001, 4013
Hanuri 4010
Hauppauge 4044
Heliocom 4219
Helium 4219
Hinari 4007
Hirschmann 4015, 4024, 4210, 4216,
4218, 4219
Hisawa 4013
Hisense 4016
Hitachi 4006, 4114, 4199, 4203
Homecast 4084, 4085, 4087
Houston 4048
HTS 4117
Hughes 4064, 4068, 4192, 4194,
4196, 4202
Hughes Network Systems
4071
Humax 4025, 4030, 4060, 4097
Huth 4005, 4011, 4012, 4013,
4048, 4050, 4219, 4223
Hypson 4031
Ilo 4016
Imex 4031
Innovation 4008
Insignia 4107
Intertronic 4011
Intervision 4048, 4219
ITT Nokia 4006
Jerrold 4019
Johansson 4013
JOK 4216
JSR 4048
JVC 4029, 4065, 4089, 4117
Kamm 4217
Kathrein 4015, 4034, 4042, 4053,
4055, 4063, 4215, 4216,
4217
Kathrein Eurostar
4215
Klap 4216
Konig 4219
Kosmos 4049
KR 4004
Kreiselmeyer 4015
K-SAT 4217
Kyostar 4001
L&S Electronic 4024
Lasat 4008, 4010, 4024, 4054,
4212, 4215, 4219
Lasonic 4108
Lenco 4001, 4024, 4049, 4215,
4217, 4219
Leng 4013
Lennox 4048
Lenson 4218
Lexus 4053
LG 4049, 4103, 4107
Lifesat 4008, 4024, 4212, 4217
Lifetec 4008
Lorenzen 4219
Lorraine 4049
Lupus 4008, 4024
Luxor 4218
Lyonnaise 4052
Macab 4052
Magnavox 4127, 4101
Manata 4031, 4216, 4217
Manhattan 4006, 4010, 4048, 4216
Marantz 4055
Mascom 4010
Maspro 4006, 4217
Matsui 4216
Max 4219
Mediabox 4213
Mediamarkt 4011
Mediasat 4009, 4213, 4218
Medion 4008, 4024, 4217
Medison 4217
Mega 4053, 4055
Memorex 4127
Metronic 4001, 4004, 4005, 4010,
4028, 4031, 4217
Metz 4015
Micro electronic 4217, 4218, 4219
Micro Technology
4217
MicroGem 4106
Micromaxx 4008, 4024
Microstar 4008
Microtec 4217
Minerva 4015
Mitsubishi 4006, 4015, 4202
12
Mitsumi 4054
Morgan's 4011, 4053, 4054, 4055,
4217
Motorola 4019, 4088, 4090, 4091
Multichoice 4222
Multitec 4212
Muratto 4049
Mysat 4217
Navex 4013
Neuhaus 4009, 4048, 4217, 4218,
4219
Neusat 4217
Next Level 4019
NextWave 4223
Nikko 4011, 4217
Nokia 4006, 4040
Nordmende 4001, 4006, 4007, 4010,
4052
Nova 4222
Novis 4013
Oceanic 4051
Octagon 4001, 4004, 4050
Okano 4011
Optex 4048
Optus 4213, 4222, 4223
Orbitech 4001, 4212, 4213, 4218
OSat 4004
Otto Versand 4015
Pace 4006, 4015, 4035, 4043,
4047, 4216
Pacific 4051
Packsat 4216
Palcom 4007
Palladium 4011, 4218
Palsat 4212, 4218
Panasat 4222
Panasonic 4006, 4035, 4036, 4121,
4124, 4126, 4198, 4221
Panda 4006, 4219
Pansat 4125
Patriot 4216
Paysat 4127
PCT 4110
Philco 4101
Philips 4006, 4033, 4053, 4055,
4061, 4068, 4071, 4127,
4196, 4201, 4202, 4203,
4206, 4213, 4216
Phoenix 4050
Phonotrend 4006, 4005, 4048
Pioneer 4046, 4213
Polsat 4052
Predki 4013
Premiere 4048, 4213
Priesner 4011
Primestar 4076
Profile 4216
Promax 4006
Prosat 4005, 4007
Proscan 4066, 4093, 4122, 4197
Protek 4051
Proton 4016
Provision 4010
Quadral 4005, 4007, 4008, 4216,
4024
Quelle 4015, 4215, 4219
Quiero 4052
RadioShack 4019
Radiola 4053, 4055
Radix 4014, 4037
Rainbow 4004
RCA 4066, 4093, 4112, 4113,
4116, 4118, 4119, 4197,
4122, 4207
Realistic 4078
Redpoint 4009
Redstar 4008, 4024
RFT 4005, 4053, 4055
Roadstar 4217
Roch 4031
Rover 4024, 4217
Saba 4010, 4215, 4216, 4219
Sabre 4006
Sagem 4023, 4052
Sakura 4050
Samsung 4000, 4001, 4003, 4032,
4064, 4069, 4071, 4120,
4123, 4196, 4200
SAT 4007, 4218
Sat Cruiser 4223
Sat Partner 4001, 4004, 4010, 4013,
4049, 4218
Sat Team 4217
Satcom 4012, 4219
Satec 4217
Satelco 4024
Satford 4012
Satmaster 4012
Satplus 4212
Schneider 4008, 4212, 4216
Schwaiger 4051, 4212, 4219
SCS 4215
Seemann 4009, 4011, 4014
SEG 4001, 4008, 4013, 4024
Seleco 4048
Servi Sat 4031, 4217
Siemens 4015
Silva 4049
Skantin 4217
Skardin 4009
Skinsat 4218
SKR 4217
Skymaster 4005, 4017, 4022, 4212,
4217
Skymax 4053, 4055
SkySat 4212, 4217, 4218, 4219
Skyvision 4048
SM Electronic 4212, 4217
Smart 4215, 4217
Sony 4067, 4070, 4213
SR 4011, 4054
Star Choice 4019
Starland 4217
Starring 4013
Start Trak 4001
Strong 4001, 4004, 4008, 4024,
4049, 4222
STS 4115
STVI 4031
Sumida 4011
Sunny Sound 4024
Sunsat 4217
Sunstar 4011, 4024, 4054
Supermax 4223
Tandberg 4052
Tandy 4004
Tantec 4006
TCM 4008
Techniland 4012
TechniSat 4014, 4021, 4026, 4027,
4038, 4039, 4053, 4212,
4213, 4218
Technology 4222
Technosat 4223
Technowelt 4219
Teco 4011, 4054
Telanor 4007
Telasat 4215, 4219
Telecom 4217
Telefunken 4001, 4017, 4216
Teleka 4004, 4011, 4014, 4218,
4219
Telemaster 4010
Telesat 4219
Telestar 4212, 4213, 4218
Televes 4006, 4218
Telewire 4048
Tempo 4223
Tevion 4008, 4217
Thomson 4006, 4020, 4052, 4058,
4208, 4213, 4215, 4216,
4217, 4219
Thorens 4051
Thorn 4006
Tivax 4104
Tivo 4196
Tokai 4053
Tonna 4006, 4012, 4048, 4217,
4218
Toshiba 4194, 4202, 4203
Triad 4049
Triasat 4218
Triax 4015, 4215, 4217, 4218
Turnsat 4217
Tvonics 4214
Twinner 4031, 4217
UEC 4222
Uher 4212
UltimateTV 4070
Uniden 4079, 4127
Unisat 4011, 4050, 4053
Unitor 4013
Universum 4015, 4215, 4219
US Digital 4016
Variosat 4015
Vega 4024
Ventana 4053, 4055
Viewsat 4098
Visiosat 4013, 4048, 4216, 4217
Voom 4019
Vortec 4001
Welltech 4212
WeTeKom 4212, 4218
Wevasat 4006
Wewa 4006
Winersat 4013
Wisi 4006, 4014, 4015, 4218,
4219
Woorisat 4010
Worldsat 4216
Xrypton 4024
XSat 4217
Zehnder 4008, 4209, 4010, 4215,
4024
Zenith 4102, 4107, 4195
Zodiac 4004
CD
Yamaha 5082, 5095
CD Recorder
Yamaha 5083
MD
Yamaha 5080, 5081, 5086
Tape
Yamaha 5084, 5087
Tuner
Yamaha 5066, 5085, 5088, 5090,
5092
XM
Yamaha 5091, 5093
SIRIUS
Yamaha 5064, 5067
DOCK
Yamaha 5068, 5089
NET
Yamaha 5071, 5076, 5079, 5094
LD
Yamaha 2080
Amplifier
Yamaha 5019, 5020, 5098
Apple TV
Apple 2241
“Apple TV” is a trademark or registered mark
of Apple Inc.
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation YD340B0/RC

Navigation menu